JP6935941B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that imparts a gaming value to a player when the display result of a variable display game becomes a special result.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game is executed based on the winning of the starting winning opening arranged in the gaming area, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result mode, a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value. Is common.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of performing various effects by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-046870

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result, an image suggesting the occurrence of a special gaming state is displayed while displaying a stop symbol of the identification information so that the special result can be confirmed. It was difficult to display the game in an easy-to-see manner, and there was room for improving the interest of the game.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a display means capable of displaying a variable display game that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game. , And, when the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a predetermined random number is extracted based on the establishment of the start condition in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The start memory display control means includes a start memory means for storing the start memory of the variable display game and a start memory display control means for displaying the start memory display corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area. , The start memory display change effect that can change the display mode of the start memory display displayed in the start memory display area can be executed, and a predetermined effect can be executed when the start memory display change effect is executed. There are a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect in the predetermined effect, and when the display result of the variable display game is the special result, the first predetermined effect is the second predetermined effect. It is easier to select, and further, the display mode of the start memory display which is the target of the start memory display change effect after executing the first predetermined effect and the start memory display change after executing the second predetermined effect. When the display mode of the start memory display that is the target of the effect is the same, the start memory display change effect is performed when the second predetermined effect is executed than when the first predetermined effect is executed. The display result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory display, which is the target of the above, is characterized by high reliability of being the special result.

According to the above-described aspect of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial value random number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a figure which shows the jackpot probability according to a setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure changing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing while displaying a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing while displaying a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 hold information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 hold information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the setting example of the fluctuation pattern (variation mode). It is a figure explaining another setting example of the variation pattern (variation mode). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing when a precursor effect is executed. It is a figure which shows an example (first half) of the operation of a movable accessory and the display of a display device in a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows an example (the latter half) of the operation of a movable accessory and the display of a display device in a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows another example of the display of the display device in a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows another example of the operation of a movable accessory in a precursor effect. It is a figure explaining the precursor effect which is executed together with the pseudo-continuous variation mode (so-called pseudo-continuous effect). It is a figure which shows how the character image acts on the specific hold display. It is a figure which shows an example of the action possibility / non-actuation lottery table and the changing hold change effect lottery table during change. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd type precursor effect (variant example of precursor effect). It is a figure which shows another example of the 2nd type precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the hold change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending change effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a hold change effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a hold change effect. It is a figure explaining the situation that the look-ahead effect is canceled when there is an abnormality in the hold number command at the time of hold occurrence. It is a figure explaining the situation that the look-ahead effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the hold number command at the time of hold occurrence. It is a figure explaining another situation that the look-ahead effect is canceled when there is an abnormality in the hold number command at the time of hold occurrence. It is a figure explaining the situation that the look-ahead effect is canceled when there is an abnormality in the hold number command at the time of hold shift. It is a figure explaining the situation that the look-ahead effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the hold number command at the time of hold shift. In the second embodiment, it is a timing chart showing a change in the display mode of the hold display, the special decoration symbol, and the reduced decoration symbol with the passage of time. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the number of holdings has not reached the upper limit in the normal game state. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit in the normal game state. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the reach state occurs in the normal game state. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect occurs. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is another example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect occurs. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is another second example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect occurs. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the effect display occurs. In the modified example of the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series when the decoration 1st symbol is displayed by a plurality of lines. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the stop production setting processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the change of the display mode with the passage of time at the time of a big hit on the display screen of the display device of the 3rd Embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device at the time of a big hit in time series. It is a timing chart explaining the change of the display mode with the passage of time at the time of a big hit on the display screen of the display device of the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. In the modified example of the third embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in which the fanfare background and the "big hit" character are displayed in different display modes depending on the type of big hit. It is a block diagram which shows the effect control device of 4th Embodiment, a substrate connected to this, and the like. In the fourth embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the connection form of a plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation part which constitutes an effect control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of the connection form of a plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation part which constitutes an effect control device. It is a block diagram which shows the connection form of the voltage generation circuit and its peripheral element which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is an internal block diagram of the voltage generation circuit which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart at the time of power-on and power-off of the output voltage of the core voltage generation circuit, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit by the connection form of FIG. 74. It is a time chart at the time of power-on and power-off of the output voltage of the core voltage generation circuit, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit by the connection form of FIG. 75. It is a figure which shows the outer shape of the effect control device, and the LVDS board in 4th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen by the player during the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decorative device 1 capable of producing light emission according to the game state 1
8a and 18b are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The lighting member arranged inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25.
It is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in this specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability change state, a probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (a big hit state).
(Special game state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate a probable change state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when a player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launcher launches a game ball into the game area (speed).
The firing force can be changed in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be launched in various launch modes having different firing forces. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is allowed to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is caused to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball pulling hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
It has 0a. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30a is used.
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the player. The gaming machine 10
It is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information.
Display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs the variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the warp passage 40e and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. The stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is a start winning opening unit 1 having a first starting winning opening 36 and a third starting winning opening 42.
Since it is arranged above the 01, the game ball that has rolled on the stage portion 40b can easily win the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c (which may be a movable accessory) and the side effect unit 40d (which may be a movable accessory) form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4). doing.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to these general winning openings 35 is performed by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

A start winning opening unit 101 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40. At the bottom of the start winning opening unit 101, a first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area, starting opening 1) that gives a starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure 1 variable display game when a game ball wins a prize.
) And a third start winning opening 42 (third starting winning area, starting opening 3) that gives a start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game when the game ball wins a prize.

The starting winning opening unit 101 uses a winning switching mechanism 105 to insert a game ball entered from the common entrance 103.
It is configured so that the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 can be alternately won. A known mechanism (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 201) is used as the winning switching mechanism 105.
5-36026 (described in JP-A-2015-77230) can be used. The winning switching mechanism 105 constitutes an area changing means for changing the winning area.

The winning switching mechanism 105 divides the game ball entered from the common entrance 103 of the starting winning opening unit 101 into the left side (first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (third starting winning opening 42 side), and starts the starting winning opening unit. Let it flow down in 101. At the time of left-handed hitting in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32, the game ball is more likely to flow into the common entrance 103 of the starting winning opening unit 101 than at the time of right-handed hitting.

The winning switching mechanism 105 includes a rotating member that rotates about a rotation axis with respect to the main body of the starting winning opening unit 101, and a stopper member that stops the rotation of the rotating member. The rotating member has three extending portions extending from the axis of rotation in three directions. The three extending portions provide an L-shaped accommodating portion for accommodating the game ball flowing down to the first starting winning opening 36 and an L-shaped accommodating portion accommodating the game ball flowing down to the third starting winning opening 42. It is formed.

The winning switching mechanism 105 alternately rotates the rotating member to the left side and the right side, and alternately switches the starting winning opening for the game ball to win the first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42. Unless there is an error, the game ball that has entered the common entrance 103 of the start winning opening unit 101 alternates between the left side (first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (third starting winning opening 42 side) by the winning switching mechanism 105. The first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 will be alternately won (balls).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, below the start gate 34 of the normal drawing,
A normal variable winning device 37 provided with a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area) for imparting a starting condition (starting condition) for the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning of the game ball is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts a game ball into a state in which it is easy to flow in by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. The game ball is the first start winning opening 3
6. When the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) or the third starting winning opening 42 is won, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called electric chew type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Then, the game ball changes to an open state (a state in which the game is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general power support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probability change state (excluding the latent probability change state) as the specific game state, the time saving state (Public electricity support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower left of the normal variable winning device 37, the large winning opening solenoid 39b (FIG. 3).
A special variable winning device 39 having an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that opens the large winning opening by retracting from the front to the back is provided. The special variable prize device 39 converts the large prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the large winning opening as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

The variable winning device unit 107 is provided with a general winning opening 35 in the game area 32 at the lower right, in addition to the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39.

General winning opening 35, 1st starting winning opening 36, 3rd starting winning opening 42, normal variable winning device 37,
And when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (FIG. 3).
Refer to), the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21.
Further, in the game area 32 below the starting winning opening unit 101, an out opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 (LED lamps) that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display) and a second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. (Special figure 2 display), fluctuation display unit 53 (normal figure display) for the normal figure fluctuation display game, and storage display unit for starting (holding) storage number notification of each fluctuation display game (special figure 1 hold). It has a display 54, a special figure 2 hold display 55, and a normal figure hold display 56).

Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (when it should be hit normally). When the time saving state occurs, the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display) that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the jackpot probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. Third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, high probability notification LED, probability status display unit)
, A round display unit 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning device 39) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit.
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed, all the LEDs provided as a display are turned on and off (all LEDs are blinking at the same time) or circulated on (any of them). It may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from one LED), or may be turned on and off (blinking) or circulated by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also in the normal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (blinking) in which the LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special figure variation display game. It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items (number of holds). The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle as a variable display. Batch display device 50
The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the normal figure display 53 is measured by the game control device 100, whereas the lamp display unit 1 of the lamp display device 80, 2
The fluctuation time of is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (decorative special figure 1 hold LED 1, decorative special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the number of decorative special figure 1 hold (first start storage number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (decorative special figure 2 hold LED 1, decorative special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the number of decorative special figure 2 hold (second start memory number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. indicate.

The blinking cycle of the lamp displays 1 and 2 (fourth special symbol described later) and the blinking cycle of the lamp display 3-6 (decorative special figure hold) are the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 m).
(sec off) may be used, but the blinking cycle may be different so that the decorative special symbol hold and the fourth special symbol can be easily distinguished. Further, the on / off (display / non-display) time of the lamp display units 1-6 may be different.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area 32 from a ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the first start. Win a prize in the winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, or flow into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and discharge from the game area 32. Will be done. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. Prize ball is on the upper plate 2 via the payout device
It is discharged to 1.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure fluctuation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking and displaying this LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, and the winning of the third starting winning opening 42 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.
It is detected by (see FIG. 3) and the start port 3 switch 42a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment), and is stored in the normal variable winning device 37. The game ball that has won the third start winning opening 42 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment).

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure 1 start winning memory (special figure 1 start memory, first start memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and the display device 41. It is also displayed on the display screen of. Special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 start memory, 2nd
The stored number of the start storage) is displayed on the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the third start winning opening 42 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode. again,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game for varyingly displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) corresponding to each special figure variation display game is executed.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Further, in the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) fluctuates due to repeated (blinking) lighting display and extinguishing display, and the special symbol fluctuates. Display Indicates that the game is running. After a predetermined time from the start, the variation display of the fourth special symbol is stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "turning on" in the case of a big hit. The variation display of the fourth special symbol is displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80, but the other display devices 4
1. It may be displayed on the sub display device.

When a game ball is awarded to the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, or the ordinary variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value).
As a result of the special figure variation display game, there is a specific result mode (special result mode) according to the display symbol.
Is derived, and it becomes a big hit state (special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire a large number of game balls. NS.

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being executed at the same time. The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed in the order in which winning (that is, starting memory) occurs (winning order digestion), and the special drawing 1 variable display game and / or When the start memory of the special figure 2 variation display game is generated and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the variation display game based on the oldest start memory is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the third starting winning opening 42 The switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and are non-contact to detect a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (front frame opening detection switch 64) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like.
A micro switch having mechanical contacts can be used as the main body frame open detection switch).

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and has a CP having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111.
It includes a U unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. , Game microcomputer 11
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By setting 0, it is possible to exclude from the exchange target and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 1
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the 11 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
It includes M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111b or RAM11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. The variation pattern (variation mode) may include a pattern that causes reach.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system of reach effects (type and type of reach) in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), Special 0 reach (SP0 reach), Special 1 reach (SP)
1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value (expectation, reliability) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 0 reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach (full rotation reach). ..
In addition, the reach state is at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game (
It is included in the variable display mode in (when it becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining the variation display game execution time, etc. in the variation display without reach or reach, and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Based on this, a predetermined period for the CPU 111a (for example, 4)
It is equipped with a clock generator that generates a clock that gives msec (millisecond) timer interrupt signals and update timing of the random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111a is the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, CPU 11
1a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. Switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37
, The starting port 3 switch 42a in the third starting winning port 42, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 are connected, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as the above and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
Of the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 42a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. NS.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the gaming machine 10 has a setting changing device 43 (setting changing means) capable of changing the setting related to the game condition, and the second input port 123 is connected to the setting changing device 43 and is connected to the setting changing device 43. The signal is input. For example, the setting changing device 43 may be a setting changing device usually provided in a slot machine, and may be composed of a key switch, a button switch, a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), or the like. The setting changing device 43 is provided inside the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, for example. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting changing device 43. The setting changing device 43 may be provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100 (on the main board).

The setting change device 43 can change the settings related to the game conditions such as the probability of a big hit and the probability variation inrush rate. In the present embodiment, the settings related to the game conditions are setting 1 and setting 2.
, Setting 3 is the most unfavorable setting for the player (low setting), setting 2 is the intermediate setting (intermediate setting), and setting 3 is the most advantageous setting for the player (high setting). Is.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on a front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Is entered. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives signals from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10, the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 and the like, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. Signal, shoot ball out switch signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout,
A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the overflow switch signal indicating overflow and the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies the touch switch signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and the gaming microcomputer 1 via the data bus 140.
It is taken in by 11. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is output from the output unit 13.
It is supplied to each port of 0. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is used for the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 receives open / close data of a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b to open the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information at the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and provides information about the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the normal electric solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
The current supply side segment of the batch display device 50 output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135 that generate and output the solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of c and the grand prize opening solenoid 39b. Second driver 1 that outputs a line on / off drive signal
38b, the third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 supply to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d is provided to output the external information signal to be output to the external information terminal 71.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the above. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth, which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
The driver 138d provides a level of 12V to the external information signal, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 250. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 250. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
Is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output is provided in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
The decorative special figure hold number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100 are received as the effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5.
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at V and operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor or the like. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34 and stores it in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol in a variable time for a predetermined time on the normal map display, the normal map variation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 variation display game Extract the random value for jackpot judgment and compare it with the judgment value stored in ROM111b.
Special Figure 1 Judge the hit / miss of the variable display game.

In addition, the start port 2 switch 37a and the third start winning port 4 provided in the normal variable winning device 37
The start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 3 switch 42a provided in 2, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game is extracted based on the start memory and R.
Compared with the determination value stored in the OM111b, the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 of the variable display game is based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, third starting winning opening 42) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the large winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 to control the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the large winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times, 6 times, etc.). .. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. In order to control so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the normal power support state (
(Electric support state). In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the normal electric support (electric support) is executed by overlapping the time saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time)
Is possible to shorten the time to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is set to the first.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so as to be.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening number (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so that 7b is not opened (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer.
Waiting time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from 00 starts normally.
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and delays the activation of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
It serves as a waiting means for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the timing of the power supply delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM region for calculation, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122.
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the initialization switch 11
The operation of 2 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A).
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus and checks the number of times (
For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on, the game control device 100 (the result of A1009 is "Y".
”), It is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 is a game machine. Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is not turned on (the result of A1009 is "
N "), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked in step A1008.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"".
), That is, when the standby time has expired, access to RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM that can be read and written is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (state where there is no output). (Set to) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting changing device 43 is on, that is, whether or not the setting changing device 43 is in a state where the setting can be changed (A1016). For example, when the key switch of the setting changing device 43 is turned on by inserting a key or the like, it can be determined that the setting changing device 43 is turned on.

The game control device 100 is set when the setting change device 43 is on (the result of A1016 is "".
Y ”), the setting change process for changing the setting is executed (A1017). In the setting change process, each time the button switch of the setting change device 43 is pressed by the operator, the setting of the gaming machine 10 is changed and selected in the order of setting 1 → setting 2 → setting 3 → setting 1. It should be noted that the setting may be changed by rotating the key to a predetermined position instead of operating the button switch. Then, the selected set values 1 to 3 are displayed on the 7-segment type display of the setting changing device 43. When the key switch of the setting change device 43 is turned off due to the key being pulled out, etc.
The setting (that is, the set value) is confirmed and stored in the setting information storage area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting change process ends. The 7-segment type display of the setting changing device 43 may be changed directly in conjunction with the operation of the button switch via the electric circuit, or may be changed via the gaming microcomputer 111.

The game control device 100 is set when the setting change device 43 is not on (the result of A1016 is "".
N ”), it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 read earlier whether or not the initialization switch 112 is turned on (A1018). Here, it is determined whether or not to execute the initialization that clears the RAM area.

When the initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1018 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data. Judgment (A1019). And if it is normal (the result of A1019 is "Y"
), It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1020).

Further, the game control device 100 performs a checksum calculation process (validity determination means) for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1020 is “Y”). (A1021) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1022). If the checksums match (A
When the result of 1022 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A1023 in FIG. 5B, and the process when the normal recovery from the power failure is executed.

If the processing of steps A1021 and A1022 is performed separately for the setting information storage area and the game information storage area in the RWM, only the area in which the mismatch is detected in the later step A1028-A1032 is used. May be initialized (for the game information storage area) or set to the default setting (for the setting information storage area), or even if a mismatch is detected in one of the areas, both Initialize the area (for the game information storage area)
And the default setting (for the setting information storage area) may be set. For example, when an abnormality (checksum mismatch) in the setting information storage area is detected, the subsequent step A103
Assuming that erroneous setting information is saved in the setting information storage area in 1, predetermined setting information (for example, setting 1) can be saved as an initial value in the setting information storage area as a default setting. The game information storage area is an area for storing game information (for example, random numbers, customer waiting demo information, effect mode setting, etc.) related to the game (variable display game).

Further, in the game control device 100, when the setting change process is performed (the result of A1016 is "Y".
”), When the initialization switch 112 is ON (the result of A1018 is“ Y ”), and when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1019 is“ N ”).
, Or if the result of A1020 is "N") and the checksum is not normal (A102)
The result of 2 is “N”), and the process proceeds to the process of step A1028 in FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the setting change device 43 and the initialization switch 112 form an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has a RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
It serves as an initialization means for initializing the data stored in. When the setting is changed, the initialization after the setting change process is performed before determining whether or not the initialization switch 112 is turned on. Therefore, the initialization by the setting change and the switch 112 are turned on. It is also possible to configure the system so that initialization is not performed twice.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A10).
23). The area to be initialized is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The setting information storage area is excluded from the area to be initialized. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. After that, the game control device 100 examines the area in the RWM that stores the game state and determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (A1024).
..

Here, when the game state is not a high probability state (the result of A1024 is "N"), the game control device 100 skips the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 and shifts to the process of step A1027. If the gaming state is a high probability state (A1)
The result of 024 is "Y"), and the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1025).
For example, the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the batch display device 50 is turned on (lit).
Save the data in the segment area (A1026). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and in step A1033. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the process of step A1028 is executed after the execution of steps A1018, A1019, A1020, and A1022, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to the access permission (A1028). Furthermore, all R except the setting information storage area
The AM area (including the busy signal status area) is cleared to 0 (A1029), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1030). The process of step A1029 is
An initialization means for initializing (clearing) an area other than the setting information storage area in the storage means (RAM) is configured.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized here is, for example, a part of the game information storage area (such as an area related to customer waiting demo information and an area related to setting an effect mode). Basically, the setting information storage area is not an area to be initialized, but exceptionally when the checksum is not normal (the result of A1022 is "N"), incorrect setting information is saved in the setting information storage area. Therefore, as an initial value, the specified setting information (for example, setting 1 which is the default setting) may be saved in the setting information storage area. In addition, as mentioned above, RW
The checksum may be calculated separately for the setting information storage area and the game information storage area in M.
If the checksum of either the setting information storage area or the game information storage area is not normal,
Values and information may be saved only in the abnormal area, or values and information may be saved in both areas. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1032), and executes the process of step A1033.

The command at the time of power failure recovery and step A1 transmitted in the process of step A1027.
The commands at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of 032 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command indicating the number of holds of special figures 1 and 2, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number. Includes commands and probability information commands that indicate the state of the probability. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting information command indicating setting information (setting value, setting information) of the gaming machine 10 and a power recovery (turning on). Contains recovery screen commands to indicate. In addition, a customer waiting demo command is included when a customer is waiting when the power is turned off, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode and a time reduction number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time reduction state are included. Since the RAM is initialized when the power is restored (turned on), the command at the time of RAM initialization includes the RAM indicating that the RAM has been initialized (cleared) in addition to the command at the time of power failure recovery. It also includes an initialization command. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and the effect control device 300 subsequently performs the effect control by referring to the setting information stored by itself. conduct.

The game control device 100 is a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
) Start the circuit (A1033). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 11 based on the divided signal.
It is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for 1a and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1033, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1034). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC) in the random number generation circuit
The setting of the code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the update permission register) is C.
This is done by PU111a. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol). Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number)
, R as the initial value (start value) of the random number (winning symbol random number) that determines the winning symbol of the normal figure
Save to a predetermined area of WM (A1035) and allow interrupts (A1036). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers (
By setting it as the start value), the regularity of random numbers generated by software can be broken.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1037). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is C
It is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the PU. CTC (C) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on TC2)).

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed.
That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1037, the game control device 100 is the power supply device 40.
The number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 via the port and the data bus is set (A1038), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
39). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1039 is "N"), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number update process of 1037. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1037) (A1036), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by making it stand by by the value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process of step A1037, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both cases. In order to avoid executing the update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1039 is "Y"), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1038 (A1040). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1040 is "N"), the process returns to step A1039 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. (A1041) and output off-data to all output ports (A104)
2).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1043), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1043).
A1044). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1045), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1046).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1047), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data and a RAM 111c.
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, and The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number update process. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

First, the game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (
A1201). Subsequently, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), and the initial value random number update process is completed.

Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure. It is a random number that is the initial value.

As described above, the randomness of random numbers can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals, and so on.
That is, the input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Moreover,
Solenoid (Large winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set by various processes
The output process for controlling the drive of the actuator such as the above is executed (A1304). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process,
By performing this output processing, a launch permission signal is output, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1305) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1306) and random number update. Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a, and an error. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is executed (A1308).

Further, the special figure game processing for performing the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1309).
), Next, execute the normal map game process that performs the process related to the normal map variable display game (A131).
0).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1311).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1313).

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and is a prize for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each prize ball number set for each prize opening (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, and more untransmitted data. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100 has won a prize to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2, the game control device 100 (A170)
The result of 1 is "N"), and the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (
A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed, the game control device 100 (the result of A1703 is "
Y ”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks are not completed (the result of A1703 is "N"), the process returns to the process of step A1701 and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

Further, when the game control device 100 has a count number (the result of A1701 is "Y").
), The count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1704), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area as a new remaining number of prize balls (A1707). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before the process of step A1707, a fraction less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). And if it is not 0 or more (A1709)
The result of is "N"), and the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, when it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "Y"), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency region is updated by +1 (A17).
10), the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (A1711), and further, step A170.
Return to the process of 8.

By the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

The game control device 100 updates -1 if the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (A171).
2), it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is "N"), the payout command transmission process is terminated. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is in the busy state (busy state flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (the payout busy signal is turned on ().
Busy state). That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is set to the payout control device 200 based on the state of the payout busy signal.
Is the information that sets whether or not the payout control can be started immediately, and is an idle state in which the payout control can be started immediately, a busy state in which the payout control cannot be started immediately, and an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite. Is set.

When the payout busy signal status is busy, the game control device 100 (A1)
The result of 714 is "Y"), and the payout command transmission process is completed. When it is not in a busy state, it includes a case where it is in an idle state and a case where it is in an indefinite state. In this way, the payout control device 2
If 00 cannot start the payout control immediately and does not send the payout command, it prevents unnecessary processing and puts a burden on the control by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. I try to reduce it.

The indefinite state is set by clearing the busy signal status area, for example, by processing when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can or cannot be started immediately. It will be solved with. That is, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 without transmission. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

When the payout busy signal status is not busy, the game control device 100 (A1)
The result of 714 is "N"), and it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, the number of counts other than "0" is in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if it exists.

Then, when the game control device 100 does not have a count number (the result of A1715 is "N".
”), The address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (A1716), and it is determined whether or not the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed (A17).
17). When all the checks are completed (the result of A1717 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (A171)
The result of 7 is "N"), the process returns to the process of step A1715, and steps A1715 to A17
The process up to 17 is repeated.

Further, when the game control device 100 has a count number (the result of A1715 is "Y").
), The count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1718), and the payout command corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), the initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 can start the payout control by a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. When indicated, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, conventional gaming machines require a backup function, so
There was a problem that it led to cost increase. According to the present embodiment, the payout control device 200
It is possible to realize accurate payout control without having a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning opening 42, general winning opening 35,
A game control means (a game control means) that transmits a prize ball command based on a prize of a game ball to the special variable prize device 39)
A game control device 100) and a payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is a payout control means. Control is performed to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, and a power failure occurs from the power failure. When returning, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the payout control means performs the payout control. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the start is possible over a predetermined period.

In addition, a plurality of winning areas (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning opening 42, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32. The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. It will be.

In addition, the game is controlled in a comprehensive manner, and the predetermined winning areas (first starting winning opening 36, second)
A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening 37, the third starting winning opening 42, the general winning opening 35, and the special variable winning device 39), and the game. A payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the control means, and the game control means is the payout control means output from the payout control means. Is a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command to the payout control means when a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started indicates that the payout control can be started. An external information output means (game control) that outputs a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. The external information output means includes the device 100), so that the state signal output from the payout control means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It means that it was done.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning prize). One prize ball when a prize ball command is generated in units of one prize in the mouth 42, the general prize mouth 35, and the special variable prize device 39) and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the prize information in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. Therefore, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be reduced by updating when the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area and updating in correspondence with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and outputs the prize ball signal every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside, and can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area. At the same time, by updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (A2001). Then, even though the large winning opening is not open, the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening is executed (A2002).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (A2003).
Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2005). Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2006). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch that can always win a prize is prepared (A2007). In the present embodiment, the winning port switches that can always win a prize are a winning port switch 35a, a starting port 1 switch 36a, and a starting port 3 switch 42a. The winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring is the starting port 1
A switch 36a or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter update process for updating the winning number (
A2008). Subsequently, a start port error monitoring process for monitoring a winning error of the start winning opening is executed (A2009). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the state and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (A2010). The status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, the gaming machine state check process for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).
..

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball burnout error) based on the shoot ball burnout switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. Status scan counter value is 2
If is, the monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout abnormality error) is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2013). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2014).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is monitored. Is set and the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main unit frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave invalid signal (frame radio wave invalidity) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2015). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2015)
The result of is "N"), and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, the game control device 100 determines (A2) when the value of the error scan counter is 0.
The result of 015 is "Y"), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2016), and the gaming machine status check process for determining the status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2017).
..

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality). 2 error) monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2018). ), End the winning opening switch / status monitoring process.

Since the processes from steps A2016 to A2018 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, they are executed once every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
The processing from A2016 to A2018 will be performed every 6ms.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42
Monitor the input of a, control the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and set the special figure display.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a (A26).
01). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, and the third starting winning opening 42, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted. , The game result pre-judgment is performed to determine the game result based on the prize in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
Only subtract) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2615.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "".
Y "), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the special figure game processing number to execute the game branching process according to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure change display Monitors the change start of the game, sets the change start of the special figure change display game, sets the effect, sets the information necessary for processing during the special figure change, etc. Execute (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like is executed (A2609). For details of the processing during special figure fluctuation, see FIG.
It will be described later in 2.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. The special figure display processing for setting the necessary information for the above is executed (A2610). The details of the processing during display of the special figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The fanfare / interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the large winning opening, update the number of opening times, set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the large winning opening, and the like (A2611). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later in FIG. 24.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the jackpot is set. The middle process is executed (A2612). The details of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening will be described later in FIG. 25.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, the process of setting the information necessary for performing the jackpot end process, etc. Execute (A2613). For example, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure Execute the jackpot end processing that sets the information necessary for executing the normal processing (A)
2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal power support state after the jackpot state ends (the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal power support state after the jackpot state ends ( Set necessary information such as (time saving state), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game processing number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (number of time reduction fluctuations, number of electric support) of the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state and the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state. ) Information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and wins a prize in the first starting winning opening 36 (A2702). It is determined whether or not there is (A2703). If there is no winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (in the normal electric support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special time reduction (during the normal electric support state) (A)
The result of 2704 is "N"), and the processes after step A2707 are executed. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (in the normal electric support state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2705). A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of this embodiment, the first start winning opening 36 must be left-handed to win a prize.
The normal variable winning device 37 will not win unless it is right-handed. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, normal power support). When left-handed during the state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing right-handed by the display device 41 or the like. ..

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2707).
A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). If there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the processes after step A2716 are executed.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), The process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a fraudulent electric service is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the Fuden fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) when the normal electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Special figure start port switch common processing is executed (A2715), step A2
The processing after 716 is executed. In addition, at A2713, a fraudulent electric service is occurring (A271).
Even when the result of 3 is determined to be “Y”), the processes after step A2716 are executed. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

The game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the third starting winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2716), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2717), and executes the hard random number acquisition process (A2717).
It is determined whether or not there is a prize in 2 (starting port 3) (A2718). If there is no winning in the third starting opening winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (in the normal electric support state) (A2719).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special time reduction (during the normal electric support state) (A)
The result of 2719 is "N"), and the processes after step A2722 are executed. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (the result of A2719 is "Y"), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2720), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2720). A2721).

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of this embodiment, the third start winning opening 42 must be left-handed to win a prize.
The normal variable winning device 37 will not win unless it is right-handed. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the third start winning opening 42 during the normal power support state (that is, normal power support). When left-handed during the state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing right-handed by the display device 41 or the like. ..

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the third start winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2722), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A).
2723), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710) in the start port switch monitoring process.
, A2717) will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

First, the game control device 100 sets information indicating that there is no winning in the starting winning opening (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2).
802) If there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710. In the hard random number acquisition process of step A2717,
The start port 3 switch 42a.

When the game control device 100 receives an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "Y".
”), The random number latch register status (state of the random number latch register) is read, and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804).
If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process ends.

When the game control device 100 has latch data in the target random number latch register (A280)
The result of 4 is "Y"), the jackpot random number extracted to the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (A2805), and the start opening winning information indicating that there is a winning in the starting winning opening is set. (A2806). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the common processing of the special figure start port switch.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special figure start port switch common process (A2708, A) in the start port switch monitoring process.
The details of 2715, A2723) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, or the start port 3 switch 42a.

First, the game control device 100 externally manages information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the device, is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). When the number of outputs does not overflow (A
The result of 2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output number region of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 has a special figure hold number (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 42a. Is less than the upper limit value (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated by +1. (A2906).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command or decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure hold number as an effect command. (A2907), and execute the effect command setting process (A290).
8). Then, the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2909). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2910), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2911). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2912), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2913).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2914). Next, the address of the variation order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number in the RWM is calculated (A2915).
), Save the target variation order flag in the calculated variation order flag storage area (A2916)
). As a result, the address of the storage area corresponding to any of the hold (for example, hold 1 to 8) is calculated, and the change order flag indicating the change (variation display game) of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is saved. Subsequently, the special figure reservation information determination process is executed (A2917), and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, and the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory that is the execution right of the variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) first sets various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number.
Stored as a start memory, the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) or the third starting winning opening 4
Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to 2 are stored as the second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2917) in the start port switch common process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process.
The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead (pre-determination) process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

The game control device 100 first prepares a low probability determination flag indicating that the determination is made with a low probability (A3001), and determines whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (low probability determination value). A look-ahead jackpot determination process for determining whether or not is executed is executed (A3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3003). When the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (A3004), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 is set. Acquire the symbol information (A3005), and step A
It shifts to the process of 3007. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit (the result of A3003 is "
N ”), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3006), and the process proceeds to the process of step A3007.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area in the RWM (
A3007). Subsequently, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3008), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3009). The look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) indicates stop symbol information or the like determined by the low probability determination value.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability determination flag indicating that the determination is made with a high probability (A3010), and depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (high probability determination value). A look-ahead jackpot determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is executed (A3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3012). When the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3012 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (A3013), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 is set. Acquire the symbol information (A3014), and step A
The process proceeds to 3016. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit (the result of A3012 is "
N ”), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3015), and the process proceeds to the process of step A3016.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is in a high probability state (probability variation state, special figure high probability) (A3016). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A3016 is "Y"), the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area in the RWM (A3017), and the process proceeds to step A3018. When not in high probability state (result of A3016 is "N"
), The process of step A3017 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3018 as it is.

In this way, in the high probability state, the stop symbol information determined by the high probability determination value is overwritten in the symbol information area and finally saved. On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state), the stop symbol information (A3007) determined by the low probability determination value is finally saved in the symbol information area. The stop symbol information finally saved in the symbol information area is used in the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern (A3020, A3021).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3018), and executes the effect command setting process (A3019). The look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) indicates stop symbol information or the like determined by the high probability determination value. Next, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3020), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game is executed. (A302
1). The special figure information setting process in step A3020 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3021 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the variation start process in the special figure normal process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number as an effect command (A3022), and executes the effect command setting process (A3).
023), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300.
As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the hold display 633 displayed on the display device 41, the player is notified of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. Is possible.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

Further, by the above processing, both the look-ahead judgment result of the big hit judgment with the low probability judgment value and the look-ahead judgment result of the big hit judgment with the high probability judgment value are the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the look-ahead stop symbol command, respectively. As (high probability), it is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
As a result, even if the probability state of the jackpot changes after the transmission of the look-ahead stop symbol command, the effect control device 300 can execute the look-ahead notice (hold change notice, etc.) corresponding to the probability states before and after the change.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (A3301). When both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3310. If at least one of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3301 is "N"), the variation order corresponding to the hold (hold 1) (oldest hold) to be digested first. The variation order flag is loaded from the flag storage area (for a total of 1 pending numbers) (A3302).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation order flag indicates the variation of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variation display game) (A3303). When the variation order flag indicates the variation of the special figure 1 (the result of A3303 is "Y"), the decorative special figure 1 corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 1
The hold number command is prepared as an effect command (A3304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3305). This decorative special figure hold number command includes information on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 1 hold number (the special figure 1 hold number after executing the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now on). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3306), and the special figure normal process is ended.

Further, when the fluctuation order flag does not indicate the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (the result of A3303 is "N".
That is, in the case of indicating the variation of the special figure 2, the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3307), and prepares the effect command. Execute the setting process (A3308). This decorative special figure hold number command includes information on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 2 hold number (the special figure 1 hold number after executing the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on). Then, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3309), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In the game control device 100, when both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (A3301).
The result is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3310). If the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3310 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3315. If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3310 is "N"), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (A3311), and the customer waiting demo command is prepared as a production command (A3312). Execute command setting processing (A3213)
). The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command executes the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the customer waiting demo progress timer area (A33).
14) If the customer waiting demo progress timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A3315).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "0" related to the special figure normal processing as the processing number (
A3316), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3317). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3318), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area in the RWM (A3319), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In this way, the variation order flag is loaded from the variation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1) corresponding to the hold (hold 1) to be digested first, and the variation display game of the type indicated by the variation order flag. (Special Figure 1 Variable Display Game or Special Figure 2 Variable Display Game) is started. That is, the variable display game is executed in the order in which the winning (starting memory) is generated.
Holds will be digested in order of winning, starting with the oldest.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3306) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variable symbol determination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss or a big hit and the missed stop symbol pattern or the jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In addition, the number of rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number are acquired and saved.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number), which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3309) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 16 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 uses the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the above is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information, which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507).
..

Next, the game control device 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3514), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the information that the jackpot flag 1 is out of the area (A36).
01). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3604) is not a big hit (A)
The result of 3605 is "N"), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated while the information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 18 is performed for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the information that the game control device 100 is out of the jackpot flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3704) is not a big hit (A)
The result of 3705 is "N"), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process, etc. (
Details of A3604 and A3704) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A380).
The result of 2 is "Y"), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A3807), and the big hit judgment process is completed.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A3).
The result of 802 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a high probability state (probability variation state) (A3803). Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"".
), Set the upper limit judgment value in high probability (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3806 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Big hit probability]
FIG. 21 is a table illustrating the jackpot probability and the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-mentioned special figure game processing for each setting.

As shown in FIG. 21, the jackpot probability at the low probability and the jackpot probability at the high probability increase as the set value increases (the setting becomes higher), and the jackpot is likely to occur, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 20 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the setting information by changing the range of the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the setting information (setting value). In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the low probability and the jackpot probability at the high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure fluctuation processing (A2609) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during special figure fluctuation.

First, the game control device 100 uses a symbol stop command (special symbol 1 symbol stop command or special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 variable flag or special figure 2 variable flag) as an effect command. Prepare (A4701) and execute the production command setting process (A4701)
A4702). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 800 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 msec. When transmitting the display time information to the effect control device 300, a display time command corresponding to the display time may be prepared, and the effect command setting process may be executed for the display time command. The display time command in this case is a kind of a symbol stop command (B1319 in FIG. 35 described later). Also, A
The processing order of 4702 and A4703 may be changed, and the display time information may be included in the symbol stop command and transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure (A4).
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 has a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area used when outputting the symbol fixed number signal related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Save to (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). , Ends the process transition setting process during special figure change.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display processing (A2610) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure.

First, the game control device 100 has a jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and a jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process. And, load (A4801), RWM jackpot flag 1
Clear the area and the jackpot flag 2 area (A4802).

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4803), and if it is a jackpot (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game. The test signal related to the start of (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is set in the test signal output data area of the RWM. Save (A4811) and set the round number upper limit table (A4812).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (
The result of A4803 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot ("
In the case of a big hit (A4804), if it is a big hit (the result of A4804 is "Y"), a test signal regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory The continuous operation device operating signal is turned on, the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4805), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A4812).

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4804 is "N".
”), The high-probability fluctuation number update process, which is a process for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state, is performed (A4806). Then, as a processing number, "0" related to the special figure normal processing
(A4807), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A480)
8), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A4809). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A4810), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit value (the round number upper limit value) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information.
In the case of this embodiment, 16 or 6) is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (A4813). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A4814).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 issues a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern RW.
Load from the M decoration special figure command area and prepare as a production command (A4815),
The effect command setting process is executed (A4816). After that, a probability information command related to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A4817), and the effect command is prepared. The setting process is executed (A4818). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the presence / absence of the sitting one-shot effect execution flag set in the special figure information setting process and the upper limit of the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A4819), and the effect command setting process is executed. (A4820).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare time according to the presence / absence of the sitting one-shot effect execution flag (A4821), and clears the sitting one-shot effect execution flag (A482).
2). For example, the fanfare time is 1 if there is no sitting one-shot production execution flag.
Set 0000ms, and set 100ms if there is a sitting one-shot effect execution flag.

After that, the game control device 100 determines the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 10000 mse).
c) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4823). Then, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (A4824), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening (A4825). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is executed (A4826), and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 39 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It serves as a special game state generating means for generating a state. For example, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the special game state by +1 (A5701).
, A round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) is prepared as an effect command (A5702), and the effect command setting process (A5703) is performed.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5704), and sets the processing number to "4" related to the processing during the large winning opening opening (A5704). A5705), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5706)
.. After that, a signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5707), and the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear the information in the mouth count area (A5708). Then, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A5709), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening opening processing (A2612) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening of the present embodiment.

The game control device 100 first determines the current number of rounds and the RW in the running special game state.
It is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of M (A5901). Then, when it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is "N"), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5902), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5904).

When the game control device 100 is in the final round (the result of A5901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state as an effect command (A5903). , Execute the production command setting process (
A5904).

After that, the processing number is set to "5" related to the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening (A5905), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5906). Remaining sphere processing time (for example, 1.
9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5907), and then the off data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A5908), and the large winning opening is being opened. End the process.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a and control of the entire processing related to the normal map fluctuation display game,
Set the display of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
Only subtract) (A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. The general figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set table of the game sequence of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the game processing number of the game, and the game branching process according to the game processing number of the game is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Monitoring the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, setting the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, setting the effect, setting the information necessary for processing during the normal map fluctuation, etc. Execute (A7608). The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 27.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing (the game control device 100). A7609). The details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power according to whether or not the time is shortened. The normal map display processing is executed (A7610), in which the opening time is set, the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-time processing is set, and the like. The details of the processing during display of the normal map will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 normally continues the processing during the normal drawing or sets the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). For details of the processing during normal drawing, see Fig. 3.
It will be described later at 0.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ).

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (A7604).
If the result of is "N"), that is, the time is not up, the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps is executed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a procedure for normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901).
.. If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the hit random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of RWM. (
The hit symbol random number is loaded from (for 1 hold number), and the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) after loading are cleared to 0 (A7902). .. Furthermore, whether or not the probability of winning the result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal figure high probability (in the high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal power support state). (A7903). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7904).
), When the high probability of the normal figure is in progress (the result of A7903 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case), which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure, is set (A7905), and step A7906 Move to the processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). The upper limit judgment value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal figure. When the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
In the case of a loss, the process proceeds to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "
Y "), that is, in the case of deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
.. Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the out-of-order symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "
N "), that is, in the case of a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is set. The stop symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In addition, there may be several kinds of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4), save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per normal figure (A7916), and clear the free area after shift to 0 (A7917).
), The number of reserved figures is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one.
By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the normal figure game processing timer area (A7).
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
It is distributed to 1500 msec with 6 and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the normal figure is executed (A7921), and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated. In the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process, in order to shift to the normal map fluctuation processing, "1" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map fluctuation time is saved in the normal map fluctuation time. Save to the game processing timer area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reserved figures is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y ”), set“ 0 ”as the processing number for shifting to normal processing (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (A7294), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (A7609) in the normal map game processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" (A8301) as a setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map, and saves the process number in the normal map game process number area (A8301).
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display device, in the normal map game processing timer area (A8303). ..

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal diagram (the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (A8).
305) Ends the processing during the change of the normal map.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (A7610) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing of the normal drawing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A84).
02). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

When the hit information is set in the hit flag, the game control device 100 has (A8403).
The result of is "Y"), the hit processing setting table is set (A8404), the hit start pointer value (0 or 5 in this case) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired, and the normal figure hit middle control pointer area. Save to (A8405). In addition, the hit end pointer value (4 or 7 in this case) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit end pointer area (A8406).
). Next, the normal power opening time (for example, 1700 msec or 2) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information
600 msec) is acquired and saved in the normal map game processing timer area (A8407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and it is possible to open the normal variable winning device 37 three times or two times, for example.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 has "3" as a processing number for shifting to the processing during the normal drawing.
(A8408), and save the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A840).
9). After that, the signal related to the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game (the medium signal per normal symbol is turned on).
Then, the signal related to the start of normal electric operation (normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). Further, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the Fuden solenoid (A8411).
..

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), and determines the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37. Clear the information in the area of the number of illegal winnings of the Fuden to be stored (A8413). Finally, a flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is saved in the Fudaden fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

When the hit information is not set in the hit flag, the game control device 100 has (A840).
The result of 3 is "N"), and "0" is set as the processing number for shifting to normal processing (A).
8415), the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A8416). afterwards,
The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the processing during the normal map display is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure per-middle processing (A7611) in the per-figure game processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the normal drawing.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during normal drawing (A860).
1) It is determined whether or not the value of the loaded control pointer per normal figure has reached the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer per normal figure (value at the end of hit) (A8602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control device 100 controls during hitting the normal figure. Update the pointer by +1 (A8603). In addition, the normal operation transition setting process is executed (A).
8604), the processing during the normal drawing is completed. In the normal power operation transition setting process, the normal power solenoid 3
While controlling the on / off of 7c, the wait time and the open time of the normal power are acquired and saved in the normal map game processing timer area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (the value at the end of hitting) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), The normal operation transition setting process is executed (A8604) without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal figure hitting process control pointer area in step A8603, and the normal drawing hitting process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 31A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 31B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the start port error monitoring process (A2009) and the payout command transmission process (A13)
05), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312)
), Based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313), the process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or amusement park internal management device or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer, etc. I do.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9501). If a switch error is occurring (A9501 result is "N")
Save the off-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9502).
). When a switch error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y"), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9503).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9504). If no glass frame opening error is occurring (A9504 result is "N")
Determining whether or not a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9505)
.. When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (A9505 result is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9506), and the off data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to the area (A9507).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9504 is "Y") or the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a glass frame opening error.
The on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9508), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9509).

After steps A9507 and A9509, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9510), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). Judgment (A9511). As the initial value of the security signal control timer, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main process).
). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time when the RAM is initialized.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A).
9512), the process proceeds to step A9513. That is, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9511 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9513). When the magnet fraud generation flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. When the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9514). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

In the game control device 100, when the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N").
Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a large prize opening fraud is occurring (A9515). If the fraudulent prize occurrence flag for the large prize opening is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the large winning opening fraud is occurring. When there is no big prize opening fraud (A9515 result is "
N "), and further, it is determined whether or not a fraudulent electric service is occurring (A9516). If no fraudulent operation is occurring (the result of A9516 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a start port error is occurring (A9517). When the error occurrence flag is saved in the start port error flag area, it can be determined that the start port error is occurring. When no start port error is occurring (A)
The result of 9517 is "N"), and it is further determined whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9).
518).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y".
”), When the board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9514 result is“ Y ”), when the big prize opening fraud is occurring (A9515 result is“ Y ”), when the Fuden fraud is occurring. (A9516
The result of is "Y"), or when a start port error is occurring (the result of A9517 is "Y").
, Save the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A951)
9). After that, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A).
9520), the main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9521).

The game control device 100 is used even when the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9518 is "N").
), The main prize ball signal editing process is executed (A9521). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the start port (A9522).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol confirmation number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game is not 0 (A9523). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is 0 (A9524). When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is 0 (the result of A9524 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is output as external information output data. Save to the area (A9525) and end the external information editing process.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is not 0 (A952).
If the result of 4 is "N"), that is, the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9526), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 32
Is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (
B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B).
0003) Allow interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is enabled, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0009). continue,
The hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal display by the player is executed (B0010). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0011), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0012). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect display editing process such as updating various data according to the contents displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B0013). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B00).
14).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B).
0014). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0015 is "N"), the process of B0015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0015 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
016). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0017).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0019). In the movable body control process, for example, the solenoid is driven to execute the accessory movement effect.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0019 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0019 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the details of the received command check process (B0012) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of command receptions is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103)
), Copy the contents of the receive command buffer of RAM to the command area for analysis (B11)
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer contains 32 received commands.
It is configured so that up to one can be saved. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the analysis command area. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing analysis directly in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y".
]), The received command content of the command area for analysis is loaded (B1107), and the received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE unit (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower levels of the received command are M.
It is configured in the order of ODE section and ACTION section.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.) is determined. Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (B1203)
The result is "Y"), and the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and there is a variable command (set by the variable start information setting process). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the jackpot command (
B1207). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during the jackpot. For example, a fanfare command (A4819), a round command (A5702), and an interval command (A).
5902), ending command (A5903) and the like. Then, when the MODE unit represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the jackpot command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a jackpot command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 207 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the symbol command ("."
B1209). In addition, the symbol system command includes a decorative special symbol command (set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command processing is executed (B).
1210), the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of one-shot commands (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 11 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol command includes the look-ahead stop symbol command (A3 in FIG. 14).
008, A3018). Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing is executed (B1214).
Ends the received command analysis process.

When the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead symbol command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). For the look-ahead fluctuation command, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command (A)
3022). Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead variable command (B12)
The result of 15 is “Y”), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is completed.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. If the MODE section is not in the normal range (B1202 result is "N"), the ACTION section is not in the normal range (B1203 result is "N"), or AC for the MODE section.
Even if the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the reception command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B).
1302), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). Then, when the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command, (B1
The result of 303 is "Y"), and the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (
B1304), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the RAM initialization command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1303 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (B1305). And when the MODE part represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1)
The result of 307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1307 is "N"), then the MODE section is decorated with special figure 1 hold number command (A2907)
, A3304) is determined (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the MODE section sets the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (A2).
It is determined whether or not it represents 907, A3307) (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section represents a probability information command, (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 313 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, and a state on command as error / illegal commands. And MO
When the DE section represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316).
Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode. Judgment (B1317). Then, when the MODE section represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1).
318), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1319). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 and a symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1320).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1320 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1321), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1322), and ends the one-shot command process. In the process of B1322, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit". Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1319 is "N".
”) Or when the command in the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1320 is“ N ”).
The effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In single-shot command processing, when the MODE section represents a setting information command,
The setting information (setting value) related to the game conditions of the gaming machine 10 included in the setting information command is stored in the RAM.
You may execute the process of storing in.

[Special figure 1 Hold information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36A, the details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process (B1310) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process (FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 36A shows the effect control device 30.
FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 1 hold information setting process executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (first start storage number information) (B1401a). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command. For example, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is increased or decreased by 2 or more at a time, the number of reserved decorative special figures 1 and the number of reserved decorative special figures 2 do not increase alternately in the normal game state, and the number of reserved decorative special figures 1 is continuously increased. If it increases, decoration special figure 1
When only the look-ahead command (look-ahead symbol command or look-ahead variable command) related to special figure 1 is received without receiving the hold number command, the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (first)
It can be determined that there is an abnormality in the start memory number information). Decorative figure 1 Missing number of pending commands may cause such anomalies. The first start winning opening 36 is provided by the winning switching mechanism 105.
When the third start winning opening 42 and the third start winning opening 42 alternately receive prizes, the number of reserved special figures 1 and the number of reserved special figures 2 are alternately increased.

The effect control device 300 is used when there is an abnormality in the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (B1401a).
The result of is "Y"), special figure 1 hold number command error flag is set (B1402a), special figure 1
Hold number Stores the special figure 1 hold number obtained from the command (B1403a). If the special figure 1 hold number cannot be obtained from the abnormal decorative special figure 1 hold number command, the process of B1403a does not have to be executed. When there is no abnormality in the special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1401a is "N"), the special figure 1 hold obtained from the special figure 1 hold number command without setting the special figure 1 hold number command error flag. Store the number (B1403a). After that, the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 Hold information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the details of the special figure 2 hold information setting process (B1312) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process (FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 36B shows the effect control device 30.
FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 hold information setting process executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (second start storage number information) (B1401b). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) acquired from the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. For example, when the number of reserved special figures 2 increases or decreases by 2 or more at a time, the number of reserved decorative special figures 2 and the number of reserved decorative special figures 2 do not increase alternately in the normal game state, and the number of reserved decorative special figures 2 continues. If it increases, decoration special figure 2
If you do not receive the hold number command but receive only the look-ahead command (look-ahead symbol command or look-ahead variable command) related to special figure 2, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (second)
It can be determined that there is an abnormality in the start memory number information). Decorative figure 2 Missing number of pending commands can cause such anomalies. The first start winning opening 36 is provided by the winning switching mechanism 105.
When the third start winning opening 42 and the third start winning opening 42 alternately receive prizes, the number of reserved special figures 1 and the number of reserved special figures 2 are alternately increased.

The effect control device 300 is used when there is an abnormality in the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (B1401b).
The result is "Y"), the decoration special figure 2 hold number command abnormality flag is set (B1402b), and the special figure 2 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is stored (B1403b). note that,
Abnormal decoration Special figure 2 Hold number If the special figure 2 hold number cannot be obtained from the command, B1403
It is not necessary to execute the process of b. Decorative figure 2 Hold number When there is no abnormality in the command (B140)
The result of 1b is "N"), and the special figure 2 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is stored without setting the decoration special figure 2 hold number command abnormality flag (B1403b). afterwards,
Special figure 2 The hold information setting process is terminated.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 37 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B160).
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 38 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is a hold number command abnormality flag of the corresponding special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1701). The hold number command error flag of the corresponding special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is set by the special figure 1 hold information setting process (FIG. 36A) or the special figure 2 hold information setting process (FIG. 36B). be. When there is no hold number command error flag of the corresponding special figure (the result of B1701 is "N"), the processing after step B1703 is executed to send the look-ahead variable command (that is, the judgment result of look-ahead (pre-judgment)). Based look-ahead production (
Notice production) will be drawn and set.

When the effect control device 300 has the hold number command abnormality flag of the corresponding special figure (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) (the result of B1701 is “Y”), that is, the hold number command of the corresponding special figure. When there is an abnormality in, it is determined whether or not the number of start memories (number of start memories) indicated by this hold number command (start memory number information) is equal to or less than the upper limit number (B1702). In this embodiment, the upper limit is 4. If it is less than or equal to the upper limit (the result of B1702 is "Y"), step B
The process after 1703 is executed, and the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead variable command is drawn and set. In this way, even if there is an abnormality in the hold number command of the corresponding special figure, if the start storage number (hold number) indicated by the hold number command is less than or equal to the upper limit number, the look-ahead effect is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced due to an abnormality.

On the other hand, when the start storage number (holding number) indicated by the holding number command of the corresponding special figure exceeds the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment), the effect control device 300 (B1702 result is “N”). The pre-reading variable command processing is terminated without setting the pre-reading effect (notice effect) based on the pre-reading variable command (that is, the determination result of the pre-reading (pre-judgment)).

If the start storage number (holding number) indicated by the holding number command of the corresponding special figure exceeds the upper limit (the result of B1702 is "N"), the pre-reading effect currently being executed is canceled as an option. It may be (B1717). Here, the look-ahead effect includes a continuous advance notice effect, a look-ahead zone effect, a hold change notice, etc., but all the look-ahead effects currently being executed may be canceled, or some of the look-ahead effects currently being executed may be canceled. You may.

As a process after step B1703, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1703). When the above-mentioned read-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1703 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is being waited for (the result of B1703 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1704).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) has the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2).
Set the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds (B1705), and acquire the look-ahead variation command MODE section in the sub corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1705).
B1706). Next, the look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1707), and the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command is set.
Acquire a part (B1708).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1709).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (the result of B1709 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the read-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead fluctuation command area or special figure 2 look-ahead fluctuation command area) corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds (B1710). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B171).
1) It is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1712).
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Hold changes When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, because there are different types of reach for the same system,
Temporarily, the effect control device 30 does not convert the ACT unit (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command.
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit indicating the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1709 is "N"), or , When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171)
The result of 2 is "N"), and it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B).
The result of 1712 is "Y"), and the look-ahead lottery process related to the latest hold look-ahead effect is executed (
B1713). Then, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead notice effect occurs (B17).
14). The look-ahead notice effect is a kind of look-ahead effect, for example, a hold change notice (hold change notice effect). The look-ahead effect includes a continuous advance notice effect, a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). The production that starts immediately includes, for example, a pending change notice.
When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y")
, Set the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect (B1716). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold look-ahead notice effect does not occur (B171).
If the result of 4 is "N"), or if the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1715 is "N"), as it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives a symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2).
Set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE section of the command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT) of the design command.
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, for example, the symbol type is an outlier symbol or 5R.
It corresponds to the probability variation jackpot symbol, 5R normal jackpot symbol, 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, and 16R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 is a special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undecided (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. When the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, Ends variable command processing.

When the variable system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variable pattern type from the variable system command (variable command) (B1).
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect, which is the effect being changed, is executed (B19).
05). There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 40) described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points, model code, special figure type, and production mode is set (B2002), and the fluctuation is made. The address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the system command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

The effect control device 300 determines the number of points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when there is reach variation. Set the corresponding first half notice distribution group address table (B)
2004), the address of the MODE section of the variable command (variable command) and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type is acquired (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (B2007), and the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section of the variable command is set. (B2008), and draw a lottery for notices that appear during the latter half of the fluctuation (during reach) (B2009). After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variable effect (B2013) and sets the display of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting (hold shift) of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, an animation in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2016).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B).
2017), in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate in the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation related to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation is caused by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LE) of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
It is displayed in D).

[Big hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the jackpot command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of jackpot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received jackpot command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the jackpot command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is a fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect is executed (B2102). .. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state)
The game status flag indicating is set to during fanfare (B2103), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the jackpot command represents a round when the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210
When the result of 4 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. The game status flag is set during the round (B2105, B2106), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the jackpot command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B21
When the result of 07 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. Set the game status flag to be in interval (B2108, B2109)
), End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent the interval (B210)
7), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit of the jackpot command represents the ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B)
The result of 2110 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and ends with the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10. Set the inside (B2111, B2112) and end the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not represent the ending (B)
The result of 2110 is "N"), and the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot command process without executing any process.

[Variation pattern]
43 and 44 are diagrams for explaining a setting example of the fluctuation pattern (variation mode) according to the present embodiment, and show a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table. The game control device 100 is used for variation pattern setting processing (A3021, A3406, A3).
In 506 etc.), when the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number, variation mode) is determined, the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table are used as the variation pattern table.

FIG. 43 shows a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. FIG. 43A shows a variable group table when the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, when the game is in the normal game state. As described above, the normal game state is a low probability state (normal probability state) and not a time saving state.

The fluctuation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this fluctuation group table include normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and S.
There are P3 reach system and full rotation reach system, and the distribution value is set for each.

The variation group is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1. The variation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535. For example, 2008 values are assigned to the normal reach system when the result is a 16R probability variation A jackpot. That is, when the result is a 16R probability variation A jackpot, a fluctuation group of the normal reach system is selected with a probability of 2008/65536.

FIG. 43 (b) shows the contents of the normal reach type fluctuation pattern selection table used when the normal reach type fluctuation group is selected in the fluctuation group table of FIG. 43 (a). The fluctuation patterns that can be selected by this fluctuation pattern selection table include
There are three fluctuation patterns with fluctuation pattern numbers of 77 to 79, which are all normal reach, and distribution values are set for each.

The variation pattern (variation pattern number) is selected by the selected variation pattern selection table and the variation pattern random number 2. The fluctuation pattern random number 2 takes a value from 0 to 255, and has a value of 0 to 255.
For example, 216 values are assigned to the variation pattern number 77. That is,
The variation pattern of variation pattern number 77 is selected with a probability of 216/256.

FIG. 44 shows a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of alignment. FIG. 44A shows a variable group table when the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, when the game is in the normal game state. As described above, the normal game state is a low probability state (normal probability state) and not a time saving state.

The fluctuation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this fluctuation group table include normal fluctuation (no reach) 1 system, normal fluctuation (no reach) 2 system, normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach. There is a system.

FIG. 44 (b) shows a fluctuation pattern selection table of the normal fluctuation (no reach) 1 system used when the fluctuation group of the normal fluctuation (no reach) 1 system is selected in the fluctuation group table of FIG. 44 (a). The contents of are shown.

The variation patterns that can be selected by this variation pattern selection table include three variation patterns having variation pattern numbers 2 to 4 that have no reach. When the total number of reservations, which is the total number of reservations (starting memory number) of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, is 0 to 2 and 3, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern number 2 (the shortest fluctuation time is super). (Fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation) is not selected. When the total number of holdings is 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation pattern of the ultra-shortening fluctuation with the shortest fluctuation time) can be selected. Further, when the total number of holdings is 7 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation pattern of the ultra-shortening fluctuation with the shortest fluctuation time) is most easily selected. For example, the case where the total number of reservations (the total number of reservations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) is 0 is the case where the prize is won in the state where the total number of reservations is 0 (for example, waiting for customers).

[Omen production]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a precursor effect using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41. This precursor effect is a kind of look-ahead notice effect (hold change notice) that suggests a look-ahead result, and starts and ends during the change display of one special figure change display game. In the present embodiment, as a precursor effect, the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44 is operated, and in conjunction with the operation, an effect of switching the display mode of the hold display displayed on the display device 41 is executed.

FIG. 45 shows an example of a timing chart when executing the precursor effect. Further, FIGS. 46 and 47 show an example of the operation of the movable accessory 671 and the display of the display device 41 in the precursory effect.

In FIG. 46A, a variable display area 610 for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game is provided in the central portion of the display screen (display unit, display area) of the display device 41. In the variable display area 610, the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed by displaying the decorative special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner on each of the left, middle, and right sides, and then stopping and displaying the symbol.

Further, at the lower part of the display unit (display area) of the display device 41, a hold display unit 630 for displaying the hold display 633 (standby hold display) corresponding to the undigested start storage (hold) is provided. The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory and is arranged in the order of storage. The leftmost hold display 633 is the hold display 633 corresponding to the first stored start memory (first start memory or second start memory), and shifts to the left (hold shift) each time it is digested. (B2015, etc.). In addition, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on each start memory and the look-ahead result (preliminary judgment result) such as the fluctuation pattern are displayed on the corresponding hold display 633.
It is possible to suggest by the display mode of.

On the left side of the hold display unit 630 (standby hold display unit), there is a hold digestion area 640 (hold during change) that displays information about the start memory during digestion (start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure variation display game). A display unit, a pending display unit during execution, a pending display area during fluctuation, and a specific display unit) are provided.
In the present embodiment, the hold display 633 at the left end of the hold display unit 630 shifts (hold shift) to the hold digestion area 640 at the start of the special figure variation display game. again,
It is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game being executed, the variation pattern, and the like by the display mode of the variable pending display 643 (digestion pending display) displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Further, in the corner portion (for example, the upper left corner portion) of the display unit of the display device 41, a decorative special symbol (first identification information, 1st identification information, which is variablely displayed in the enlarged display (main display, normal display) in the variable display area 610). A small symbol (second identification information, reduced symbol) that is relatively smaller than the large symbol (large symbol, enlarged symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (2nd identification information, reduced symbol).
A variable display area 615 (variable display unit for small symbols) to be reduced (reduced display) is provided. Further, in the corner of the display unit of the display device 41 (for example, the upper right corner), the number of undigested start memories (number of special figure 1 hold, special figure 2 hold number) is displayed numerically in special figure 1 hold. A number display unit 650 (special figure 1 number hold display unit) and a special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 (special figure 2 number hold display unit) are provided. In addition, instead of the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660, the hold number display unit (number hold) that displays the total number of holds, which is the sum of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. A display unit) may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46A, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 671 having a shape imitating a ally character holding a spear. The movable accessory 671 is, for example, a display device 4.
It is possible to move up and down between the display unit (display area) of 1 and the position where it does not overlap and the position where it overlaps. Further, it is configured to be movable to the left and right without overlapping the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, and to be movable to the left and right in a state of being overlapped with the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction.

Here, the position where the display unit 41 of the display device 41 does not overlap in the front-rear direction (non-overlapping state) is a position where most (for example, more than half) of the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the display unit in the front-rear direction (non-overlapping state). be. Further, the position where the display unit 41 overlaps the display unit in the front-rear direction (overlapping state) is a position where most (for example, more than half) of the movable accessory 671 overlaps the display unit in the front-rear direction (overlapping state).

In the present embodiment, as a precursor effect, the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630
The movable accessory 671 acts on the specific hold display 633 (hereinafter referred to as "specific hold display"), and the movable accessory 671 acts on the specific hold display, which suggests the display mode of the specific hold display. An effect of whether or not to change to a mode (pending change) is executed.

Here, by displaying the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 in the suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory and the look-ahead result such as the change pattern. (Notice of pending change). Further, by displaying the hold display 633 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 in the suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure change display game being executed, the change pattern, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character at a predetermined timing (in the case of the present embodiment, at the start of the precursor effect), and then the specific hold is displayed. The display is configured to act on the movable accessory 671 (in the case of the present embodiment, the spear is pierced), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display does not have to change to a display mode that imitates an enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 45, when the variation display of the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts the hold shift effect in which the hold display 633 shifts to the next position (t11). Specifically, as shown in (a) of FIG. 46, when the special figure variation display game ends and the next special figure variation display game starts as shown in (a) of FIG. 46, the hold display 633 Shifts to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45, when the effect control device 300 is a special figure variation display game in which the special figure variation display game this time is a special figure variation display game in which the lottery for the precursor effect is completed, the effect shift effect is completed. The production is started (t12). The lottery for the precursory effect is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the precursory effect, and when the lottery for the precursory effect is won, the precursory effect is executed during the variable display of the winning special figure variation display game. NS. The lottery for the precursory effect is performed, for example, in the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41).

When the precursor effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the normal display mode to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and the movable accessory 6
The position where 71 overlaps with the display unit (display area) from the initial position (first position) that does not overlap in the front and back (first position)
Move to the second position).

Next, as shown in (d) of FIG. 47, in a state where the movable accessory 671 overlaps the display unit in the front-rear direction (that is, in front of the display unit), the tip of the spear is in front of and behind the specific hold display from the second position. The movable accessory 671 moves to a position where the movable accessory 671 can act on the specific hold display (third position). The movable accessory 671 may be capable of swinging down a spear, for example.
In that case, when the spear is swung down while the movable accessory 671 has arrived at the action position, the tip of the spear may be configured to overlap the specific hold display in the front-rear direction.

Next, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that won the lottery of the hold change notice (the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display 633 to suggest the look-ahead result), FIG. 47. As shown in (e), the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the display mode imitating the enemy character to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that was rejected in the lottery of the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode (that is, the enemy character is displayed. The precursor effect ends while the imitated display mode is maintained, or the display mode imitating the enemy character returns to the normal display mode).

The hold change notice lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the hold change notice, and when the lottery for the hold change notice is won, the display mode of the hold display 633 corresponding to the winning start memory is It changes to the suggested mode at a predetermined timing. The lottery for the pending change notice is, for example,
This is performed by the look-ahead lottery process (B1713) of the look-ahead variable command process (FIG. 38).

Next, as shown in FIG. 45, when the precursor effect is completed, the effect control device 300 starts the accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 671 returns to the initial position (first position) (t13). In particular,
As shown in (f) of FIG. 47, the action position (third) in which the movable accessory 671 overlaps the display unit in the front-rear direction.
Move from the position) to the non-overlapping position (fourth position). Next, the movable accessory 671 moves from the fourth position to the initial position (first position) without overlapping the display unit in the front-rear direction.

In this way, the precursor effect is executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game. Therefore, when the execution time of the precursor effect is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game, the end timing of the precursor effect is later than the fluctuation end timing of the special figure variation display game, which is the cause of the precursor effect. Therefore, there are inconveniences such as the effect scheduled to be executed after the end of the fluctuation cannot be executed as scheduled. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, if the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the precursory effect is shorter than the execution time of the precursory effect, the control to cancel the execution of the precursory effect or the precursory effect is performed. The control was performed to end the production in the middle. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent inconveniences such as the effect scheduled to be executed after the end of the fluctuation cannot be executed as scheduled even if such control is not performed, the execution time of the precursor effect is set. Special figure fluctuation display Make it shorter than the fluctuation time of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the execution time of the precursor effect (t12 to t13).
) Is the fluctuation time (t11 to t14) of the special figure variation display game started when the total number of reservations, which is the total number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, is the upper limit number (8 in the present embodiment). Make it shorter than.
There are various fluctuation times of the special figure fluctuation display game, but the special figure fluctuation display game with the shortest fluctuation time among the special figure fluctuation display games that can be won in the lottery of the precursor effect has a different result and the fluctuation pattern reaches. It is a special figure variation display game that is executed in the normal effect mode (normal game state) without the above, and is a special figure variation display game that is started when the total number of holdings is the upper limit (8 in this embodiment). See FIG. 44 (b)). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the execution time value of the precursor effect is set to
Starts when the total number of holdings (total of the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2) is the upper limit in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed in the normal production mode without reaching the result and the fluctuation pattern. It is set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as "holding MAX fluctuation"). As a result, regardless of the number of undigested start memories (total number of reservations) when the special figure variation display game is started, the end timing of the precursor effect is earlier than the variation end timing of the special figure variation display game. That is, it is possible to execute the precursor effect (execute from the beginning to the end) in any special figure variation display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special figure variable display game starts, the hold display 633
The hold shift effect that shifts to the next starts, and when the hold shift effect ends, the precursor effect starts. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the precursor effect is prohibited during the hold shift effect, and the precursor effect starts later than the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, even if the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the reserved MAX fluctuation, the end timing of the precursor effect may be the special figure variation display game depending on the length of the execution time of the precursor effect and the start timing of the precursor effect. It may be later than the end timing of the fluctuation of.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the precursor effect is started after the hold shift effect, the end timing of the precursor effect is earlier than the fluctuation end timing of the special figure variation display game.
As shown in, the time from the start of the hold shift effect to the end of the precursor effect (t11 to t13).
Is shorter than the fluctuation time (t11 to t14) of the reserved MAX fluctuation. That is, the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect is set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX fluctuation.

The sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect may be set to be the same as the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX fluctuation, but the result mode of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is a movable role. From the viewpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as being difficult to see with the object 671, it is preferable that the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction at the end of the variation display of the special figure variation display game. In addition, from the viewpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as making it difficult to understand that the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is stopped, at the end of the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the display mode of the specific hold display is displayed. It is preferable that the switching (change) is completed.

Further, when the precursor effect is completed, the accessory return effect of returning the movable accessory 671 to the initial position (first position) starts. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the accessory return effect ends after the timing (t15) when the next special figure variation display game starts.
It is possible to make the timing at which the character return effect ends the same as the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts, or before the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts. By setting the timing at which the character return effect ends after the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts, it is possible to secure a sufficient execution time of the precursor effect.

The precursor effect is not limited to the one using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate. The frame decoration device 18, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub display device, and the board effect device 44 can be changed as appropriate. , The board decoration device 46 and the like may be used at least one. For example, instead of the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44, the character image G1 of the ally character having a spear may be displayed on the display device 41, and the character image G1 may act on the specific hold display.

FIG. 48 shows another example of the display of the display device 41 in the precursor effect. The aforementioned movable accessory 67
Instead of 1, the character image G1 of the display device 41 is used.

When the precursor effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (Sa), the character image G1 appears on the display unit of the display device 41 (the character image G1 appears from the right side of the display unit). Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (s), the character image G1 moves to a position (acting position) capable of acting on the specific hold display. Next, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that won the lottery of the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display is a suggestion mode as shown in FIG. 48 (s). It changes to, and the precursory production ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that was rejected in the lottery of the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode, and the precursor effect ends. .. and,
When the precursor effect is completed, the character exit effect (the effect corresponding to the character return effect) in which the character image G1 exits from the action position is started. As a result, the character image G1 disappears from the display unit.

The timing at which the display of the character image G1 is started can be changed as appropriate. For example, the character image G1 may appear before the start of the precursor effect. Further, from the viewpoint of avoiding inconveniences such as making it difficult to understand that the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is stopped, the character image G1 is also stopped and displayed during the stop display of the special figure variation display game. Is preferable. Therefore, the timing for starting the character exit effect is preferably after the stop display of the special figure variation display game is completed (for example, at the start of the next special figure variation display game).

Further, the character image displayed on the display device 41 instead of the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44 is not limited to the character image G1 of the ally character holding the spear, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the way of moving the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the shape of the movable accessory 671 described above is not limited to a shape imitating a ally character holding a spear, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the way of moving the movable accessory 671 can be changed as appropriate.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the cover member 40f may be provided in front of the movable accessory 671 in a state where the display unit of the display device 41 and the front and rear do not overlap. In this case, for example, FIG.
As shown in the above figure of 9 (a), when the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, all (or more than half) of the movable accessory 671 is covered. It is hidden by the member 40f and becomes invisible (difficult to see). On the other hand, for example, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 49A, when the movable accessory 671 is in a state of overlapping the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, all (or more than half) of the movable accessory 671 is used. However, it becomes visible without being hidden by the cover member 40f.

Further, when a plurality of precursor effects having different execution time values can be executed, all the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the reserved MAX fluctuation. Of the plurality of precursor effects, only a part of the execution time values may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the reserved MAX fluctuation.

FIG. 49B shows a case where only a part of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects is set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the reserved MAX fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 49B, it is possible to execute a precursor effect A having an execution time of 2 seconds, a precursor effect B having an execution time of 3 seconds, and a precursor effect C having an execution time of 8 seconds. A precursor effect whose execution time value is smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery is executed. That is, when the special figure variation display game won in the lottery for the precursor effect is the ultra-shortened variation (variation time 4 seconds) or the shortened variation (variation time 8 seconds) shown in FIG. 44 (b), the precursor effect is produced. The precursor effect selected from A and the precursor effect B may be executed during the variation display of the special figure variation display game. If the special figure variation display game won in the lottery for the precursor effect is the normal variation (variation time 14 seconds) shown in FIG. 44 (b), the precursor effect A, the precursor effect B, and the precursor effect C are selected. The selected precursor effect may be executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game.

Of course, in this case as well, the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect is smaller than the variation time value of the special figure variation display game that won the lottery of the precursor effect. It is also possible to select.

Further, when the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the precursor effect is the pending MAX variation, the precursor effect having the shortest execution time may be executed. That is, FIG. 49 (b)
In the example shown in (1), when the special figure variation display game won in the lottery for the precursor effect is a super-shortened variation (holding MAX variation in the present embodiment) with a variation time of 4 seconds, only the precursor effect A can be selected. , Precursor effect B and precursor effect C may not be selected.

In addition, when the precursory effects are continuously executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games, the execution time values of all of the plurality of precursory effects that are continuously executed are smaller than the fluctuation time values of the reserved MAX fluctuations. It may be set, or only a part of the execution time values of a plurality of continuously executed precursor effects may be set smaller than the fluctuation time value of the reserved MAX fluctuation.

Further, among the plurality of continuously executed precursor effects, the precursor effect executed for the first time is more likely to be executed during the hold MAX fluctuation than the precursor effects executed for the second and subsequent times. Therefore, when only a part of the execution time values of the plurality of continuously executed precursor effects is set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the reserved MAX fluctuation, the execution time of the precursor effects executed at least for the first time is set. It is preferable to set the value smaller than the fluctuation time value of the reserved MAX fluctuation.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a precursor effect to be executed together with a pseudo-continuous variation mode (so-called pseudo-continuous effect).

The effect control device 300 of the present embodiment can execute the decorative special figure variation display game in a pseudo-continuous variation mode in which the unit variation display that temporarily stops after the identification information is variablely displayed is performed a plurality of times to derive the result mode. .. If there is a value smaller than the fluctuation time value at the time of hold MAX in the fluctuation time value of the unit fluctuation display in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation mode, the execution time value of the precursor effect is set to the fluctuation of the unit fluctuation display in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation mode. It can be set smaller than any of the time values (for example, the fluctuation time value of the unit fluctuation display having the shortest fluctuation time). The pseudo-continuous variation mode (so-called pseudo-continuous effect) is a pseudo-stop after the variation display of the identification information (decoration special symbol) between the start of the variation display and the stop result display in one decorative special figure variation display game. It is an effect that the unit variation display to be displayed (temporary stop display) is performed multiple times. In the pseudo-ream variation mode of the present embodiment, the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (pseudo-ream symbol) suggesting the pseudo-ream variation mode is stopped and displayed at the time of the temporary stop display.

Temporary stop time in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation mode (time between the unit fluctuation display and the next unit fluctuation display)
It is possible to execute a precursory effect with a shorter execution time than that. In the decorative special figure variation display game of the pseudo-continuous variation mode, for example, as shown in (ta) of FIG. 50, the first unit variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation mode is completed, and is shown in (chi) of FIG. As described above, among the decorative special symbols (identification information) displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas 610, the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (for example, the character "ream") that appears only during the pseudo-ream fluctuation is included. Only the symbol consisting of) remains, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is in progress. After that, as shown in (tsu) of FIG. 50, 2
The unit fluctuation display for the first time starts. In this case, the precursor effect is executed while it is notified that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is in progress.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (H), the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) moves to the action position while being notified that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is in progress. .. That is, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) acts on the specific hold display while being notified that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is in progress. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (tsu), when the second unit variation display is started, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) leaves the action position.

FIG. 51 shows an example in which the character image constituting the decorative special symbol acts on the specific hold display in the precursor effect in which the execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time in the pseudo-continuous variation mode.
The character image that acts on the specific hold display may be a character image that constitutes a special decorative symbol.

For example, as shown in (na) of FIG. 51, a pseudo-ream dedicated symbol is composed of a character image (for example, a character image of "ream") and a character image (for example, an image imitating a cloud). And FIG. 51
As shown in (d) of (d), the character image constituting the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol acts on the specific hold display while being notified that the pseudo-ream is in progress. Then, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that won the lottery of the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display is suggested as shown in FIG. 51 (N). Change to mode.

Of course, not only the precursor effect (precursor effect whose execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time) executed during the temporary stop time in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, but also the precursor effect (precursor effect) executed during the variation display of the special figure variation display game. In a precursory effect whose execution time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation), the character image constituting the decorative special symbol may act on the specific hold display instead of the movable accessory 671 or the character image G1.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a precursor effect, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 changes to the suggestion mode is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The precursor effect may be, for example, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 changes to the suggestion mode.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is obtained. When a special result is obtained, a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated.
The game machine 10 has a start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of a start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game, and a predetermined advance notice effect (precursor) during execution of the variable display game. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing the effect). A variable display game (hold) in which the execution time value of a predetermined advance notice effect is started in a state where the number of start memories stored in the start storage means reaches a predetermined upper limit (8 in the case of the present embodiment). MAX
It is smaller than the fluctuation time value of (variation).

Therefore, since the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the variation time of the hold MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure variation display game having the shortest variation time), the advance notice effect (precursor effect) should be executed in any variation display game. Can be done.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a hold shift after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) (in the case of the present embodiment, the hold shift). After the production is completed), a predetermined advance notice effect (precursor effect) is started, and the sum of the execution time value of the predetermined advance notice effect and the value of the predetermined time (in the case of this embodiment, the execution time value of the hold shift effect). Is a variable display game (pending MA) that is started in a state where the number of start storages stored in the start storage means (game control means 100) has reached a predetermined upper limit (8 in the case of the present embodiment).
It can be configured to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of (X fluctuation).

With this configuration, the precursory effect starts later than the start of the special figure variation display game, so it is possible to provide a period during which the precursory effect is not executed while giving the player expectations for the execution of the precursory effect. , It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. It should be noted that the precursor effect may be started at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can control the operation of the movable accessory 671 used for the predetermined advance effect (precursor effect), and the effect of the predetermined advance effect can be controlled. Later, it is possible to execute a return effect (character return effect) for returning the movable accessory 671 to the initial position, and the return effect is after the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which a predetermined advance notice effect is executed. It can be configured to end during the execution of a variable display game that starts.

With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a sufficient execution time of the precursory effect.
The special figure variation display game that is being executed when the character return effect is finished is not limited to the special figure variation display game that is executed next to the special figure variation display game in which the precursor effect is executed. Further, the character return effect may be terminated during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the precursor effect is executed (including the end of the special figure variation display game in which the precursor effect is executed).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area is executed, and the variable display game is executed. When the result of is a special result, a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated. The start winning area includes a first starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36) and a second starting winning area (second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37). The game machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning area and stores it as the first starting memory, and also stores the predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning area. The start storage means (game control device 100) that is extracted and stored as the second start memory, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes a predetermined advance notice effect (precursor effect) during the execution of the variable display game. Be prepared. The execution time of the predetermined advance notice effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game (holding MAX fluctuation) started in the state where the total number of holdings reaches the predetermined upper limit number (8 in the present embodiment).

Therefore, since the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the variation time of the hold MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure variation display game having the shortest variation time), the advance notice effect (precursor effect) should be executed in any variation display game. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, both the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are configured to be selected in consideration of the total number of reservations (total start storage number). Not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is selected in consideration of the number of special figure 1 hold (the number of first start memories), and the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure change display game is hold of special figure 2. It is also possible to configure the selection in consideration of the number (the number of the second start memory). In this case, in the first special figure variation display game having the shortest fluctuation time among the first special figure variation display games that can be won in the lottery of the precursor effect, the number of reserved special figures 1 is the upper limit (for example, 4). The first special figure fluctuation display game (holding MAX fluctuation) that starts at the time, and the second special figure fluctuation display game with the shortest fluctuation time among the second special figure fluctuation display games that can win the lottery of the precursor effect. Is a second special figure variation display game (holding MAX variation) that is started when the number of reserved figures 2 is the upper limit number (for example, 4).

That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution time of the predetermined advance notice effect (precursor effect) reaches the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the number of the first start memory or the number of the second start memory. It can be configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game) started in the state of being. By configuring in this way, the execution time of the precursor effect can be changed to the pending MAX fluctuation (
That is, since the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game), which has the shortest fluctuation time, the advance notice effect (precursor effect) can be executed in any variation display game.

In the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order of winning in the starting winning area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, one special figure variation display game (for example, the second special figure variation display) is executed. The game) may be configured to be executed preferentially.

[Variation example of precursory production]
The precursor effect shown in FIGS. 45 to 51 is a character image appearing on the display unit of the display device 41 (
Alternatively, it is a type of precursor effect (hereinafter referred to as "first type precursor effect") in which a movable accessory or the like that appears at a position overlapping the display unit in the front-rear direction always moves to the action position. In addition to (or instead of) this first type of precursory effect, a type of precursory effect (or a movable accessory that appears) may or may not move to the action position. It is also possible to configure it to execute (hereinafter referred to as "second type precursor effect").

In the second type of precursory effect, if the lottery for the precursory effect is won, a lottery for whether or not the action is possible is performed.
The action availability lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to move the character image to the action position. The image moves to the action position. That is, when the action possibility lottery is won, the character image appears and moves to the action position. On the other hand, if the lottery for whether or not the action is possible is lost, the character image appears but does not move to the action position.

Further, in the second type of precursor effect, after the action availability lottery is performed, a lottery for the changing pending change effect is performed. The lottery for the variable pending change effect is the variable pending change effect (pending digestion area 640).
This is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute (a production suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game being executed, the variation pattern, etc.) by changing the display mode of the pending display 643. When the lottery for the change effect is won, the change hold display 643 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 during the execution of the winning special figure change display game (specific hold display in this modification). The display mode of is changed to the suggested mode. That is, when the lottery for the changing hold change effect is won, the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. On the other hand, when the lottery for the changing hold change effect is lost, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode.

The action availability lottery and the lottery for the pending change effect during the change are, for example, the variation effect setting process (FIG. 41).
The notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) will be held.

52 (a) to 52 (c) show an example of the action possibility lottery table. In the action availability lottery table, the probability that action is selected (that is, the winning probability) and no action are selected depending on whether the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit or the result is out of order. The probability of being rejected (ie, the probability of losing) is defined.

For example, when the action availability lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (a) is set, if the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit, the special figure to be executed this time is won with a probability of 60%. Figure If the result of the variable display game is out of order, there is a 70% chance of winning.

The effect control device 300 selects one action availability lottery table from a plurality of action availability lottery tables (three types of action availability lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c)) based on, for example, a gaming state. And set.

52 (d) to 52 (g) show an example of the pending change effect lottery table during change. In the changing hold change production lottery table, there are cases where the action possibility lottery is won and the result of the special figure change display game to be executed this time is a big hit, and the special figure which is won the action possibility lottery and is executed this time. When the result of the variable display game is out of order, when the result of the special figure variable display game to be executed this time is a big hit, and when the result of the special figure variable display game to be executed is a big hit, and when the result of the special figure variable display game to be executed is a big hit, the result of the variable display game is lost and the action is executed this time. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the probability that the pending change is selected (that is, the winning probability) and the probability that no pending change is selected (that is, the losing probability) are defined.

For example, when the variable pending change effect lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (d) is set, if the action availability lottery is won and the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit. If you win with a 70% probability, win the action availability lottery, and if the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is incorrect, you win with an 80% probability, lose the action availability lottery, and , If the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit, there is a 15% probability of winning, losing the action availability lottery, and the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is out of order. Will not win.

In addition, regardless of which of the four types of changing pending change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52 (d) to 52 (g) is set, if the lottery for whether or not the action is possible is lost, the lottery for the changing pending change effect is selected. Since the winner is only when the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit, the character image G2 does not act on the specific hold display, but the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed.

The effect control device 300 is one of a plurality of variable pending change effect lottery tables (four types of variable pending change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52 (d) to 52 (g)) based on, for example, a gaming state. Hold during change Select and set the change effect lottery table.

In this modification, as the second type of precursory effect, whether or not the display mode of the variable hold display 643 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 changes to the suggestion mode is performed, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. The second type of precursor effect may be, for example, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 changes to the suggestion mode.

Further, in this modification, the character image G2 of the ally character holding the bar is displayed as the character image acting on the specific hold display, but the character image displayed on the display device 41 is not limited to this and is appropriately changed. It is possible, for example, it may be a character image G1 of a friendly character holding a spear. Further, the way of moving the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate.

Further, at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the precursor effect), the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and then the character image G2 is displayed on the specific hold display. (In the case of this modification, it is struck with a stick), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display does not have to change to a display mode that imitates an enemy character.

FIG. 53 shows an example of the second type precursor effect when the lottery for the precursor effect is won and the action possibility lottery is won.

When the precursor effect starts, first, as shown in (c) of FIG. 53, the character image G2 appears on the display unit of the display device 41 (the character image G2 appears from the left side of the display unit). Next, as shown in (H) of FIG. 53, the character image G2 moves to the action position, and the rod is swung down so that the tip of the rod overlaps the specific hold display. Next, when the running special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that has won the lottery for the variable pending change effect, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), the display mode of the specific hold display. Changes to the suggestion mode, and the precursory effect ends. On the other hand, when the running special figure change display game is a special figure change display game that has been rejected in the lottery for the change hold change effect during change, the display mode of the specific hold display is as shown in FIG. 53 (f). Does not change to the suggested mode, and the precursory effect ends. Then, when the precursor effect is completed, the character image G2 exits from the action position and disappears from the display unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, after the character image G2 acts on the specific hold display (after the bar returns to a state where it does not overlap with the specific hold display), the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. However, the timing at which the display mode of the specific hold display changes can be changed as appropriate.
For example, while the character image G2 is acting on the specific hold display (when the bar overlaps the specific hold display), the display mode of the specific hold display may change to the suggestion mode.

FIG. 54 shows an example of the second type of precursory effect when the lottery for the precursory effect is won and the lottery for whether or not the action is possible is lost.

When the precursor effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (ma), the character image G2 appears on the display unit of the display device 41 (the character image G2 appears from the left side of the display unit). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (mi), the character image G2 disappears from the display unit without moving to the action position. Next, when the running special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that has won the lottery for the variable pending change effect, as shown in FIG. 54 (m), the display mode of the specific hold display Changes to the suggestion mode, and the precursory effect ends. On the other hand, if the running special figure change display game is a special figure change display game that has been rejected in the lottery for the pending change effect during change, FIG.
As shown in (M) of 4, the precursor effect ends without changing the display mode of the specific hold display to the suggestion mode.

The length of the execution time of the precursor effect when the action possibility lottery is won and the length of the precursor effect execution time when the action possibility lottery is lost may be the same or different. In this modification, the length of the execution time of the precursor effect is, for example, the character image G2.
It is the length from the timing of starting the display of to the timing of starting the display in the suggestion mode of the specific hold display.

In addition, when the lottery for whether or not the action is possible is lost, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode after the character image G2 disappears from the display unit, but before the character image G2 disappears from the display unit, the specific hold is performed. The display mode of the display may change to the suggestion mode. In this case, the timing at which the character image G2 disappears from the display unit may be the same or different depending on whether the character image G2 is won or lost in the action availability lottery.

In addition, during the precursory effect, the background image is darkened (blacked out) in order to make it stand out that the precursory effect is being executed, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative special pattern (identification information) being displayed in a variable manner. You may let it. The same applies to the first type of precursory production.

Further, as the second type of precursory effect, a precursory effect of whether or not the display mode of the changing hold display 643 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 changes to the suggestion mode is displayed on the hold display unit 630. Both the display mode of the hold display 633 and the precursor effect of whether or not the display mode changes to the suggestion mode may be configured to be feasible. Further, in this case, the length of the execution time of the precursor effect of whether or not the display mode of the changing hold display 643 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 changes, and the hold display 633 displayed in the hold display unit 630. The length of the execution time of the precursor effect of whether or not the display mode of is changed may be the same or different. The same applies to the first type of precursory production.

The timing at which the display of the character image G2 is started can be changed as appropriate, and the hold display 6
During the hold shift effect in which 33 shifts to the next, it is preferable to prohibit the start of display of the character image G2. That is, the timing for starting the display of the character image G2 is preferably before the hold shift effect or after the hold shift effect. The same applies to the first type of precursory production.

Further, the number of times that the display mode of the specific hold display changes during the precursory effect may be determined based on a predetermined condition. That is, a change number lottery may be performed to determine the number of times to change the display mode of the specific hold display. The same applies to the first type of precursory production.

Further, the character image that appears during the precursory effect may be selected from a plurality of types of character images based on predetermined conditions. That is, a character lottery may be performed in which one character image is selected from a plurality of types of character images. The same applies to the first type of precursory production.

Further, the number of times that the character image (or a movable accessory or the like) acts on the specific hold display during the precursory effect may be determined based on a predetermined condition. That is, a lottery for the number of actions may be performed to determine the number of times the character image (or a movable accessory or the like) is allowed to act on the specific hold display. 1st
The same applies to the type of precursory production.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example in which a change number lottery, a character lottery, and an action number lottery are performed in combination.

As described above, the effect control device 300 performs an action availability lottery and a lottery for the pending change effect during change in order to determine the effect mode of the second type precursor effect. In addition to these lottery, by performing the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery in combination, the number of times (or the number of times of change) the display mode of the specific hold display changes depending on the type of character image that appears. The ratio) and the number of times the character image acts on the specific hold display (or the selection ratio of the number of times the character image acts) can be made different.

In addition to the action availability lottery and the lottery for the changing hold change effect, when the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery are combined, for example, when the lottery for the changing hold change effect is won, it is specified. A change number lottery is performed to determine the number of times to change the display mode of the hold display.
Based on the result of the number of changes lottery, a character lottery is performed to select one character image from a plurality of types of character images, and the character image is displayed on hold based on the result of the number of changes lottery and the result of the character lottery. The number of actions (for example, the number of times the specific hold display is hit with a stick) is determined by drawing a lottery. In this case, the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery are, for example, the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B2) of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 41).
009).

FIG. 55A shows an example of a character lottery table. In the character lottery table, the probability that the character image A is selected and the character image B when "1 hold change" is selected and when "2 hold changes" are selected by the change count lottery are displayed. The probability of being selected is specified.

Here, "one hold change" means changing the display mode of the specific hold display once, that is, from the normal display mode (for example, a blue circle) to the first suggestion mode (for example, a green circle). Is to change to. “Twice on hold change” means changing the display mode of the specific hold display twice, that is, changing from the normal display mode to the first suggestion mode, and then changing from the first suggestion mode to the second suggestion mode. It is to change to an aspect (for example, a red circle).

FIG. 55B shows an example of the action count lottery table. In the action count lottery table, "character image A" is selected by the character lottery, and "character image A" is selected by the change count lottery.
When "1 hold change" is selected, "character image A" is selected by the character lottery, and "2 hold changes" is selected by the change count lottery, and "character image B" is selected by the character lottery. Is selected, and "1 pending change" is selected by the change count lottery, and "character image B" is selected by the character lottery.
And, when "hold change 2 times" is selected by the change number lottery, "1 time action"
The probability that is selected and the probability that "double action" is selected are defined.

Here, the "single action" is to make the character image act once on the specific hold display (for example, hitting the specific hold display once with a stick), and the "double action" is to make the character image act once. To act on the specific hold display twice (for example, hitting the specific hold display twice with a stick).

For example, "1 pending change" is selected by the number of changes lottery, and "1 change on hold" is selected by the lottery of the number of actions.
When "Twice action" is selected, the display mode of the specific hold display may be changed by the first action of the character image acting on the specific hold display twice, or the character image may be acted twice. The display mode of the specific hold display may be changed by the second action of.

In addition, "hold change 2 times" is selected by the change number lottery, and "1" is selected by the action number lottery.
When "reciprocal action" is selected, it may be changed to the first suggestion mode and then to the second suggestion mode, or it may be suddenly changed to the second suggestion mode without changing to the first suggestion mode. It may be changed to the suggestion mode of.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is obtained. When a special result is obtained, a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated.
The game machine 10 has a start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of a start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game, and an effect control means that executes an effect related to the variable display game. (Production control device 300). The effect control means can display a predetermined image (character image G1) and a start memory display (hold display 633 or variable hold display 643) corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41, and can display a predetermined advance notice effect (a predetermined advance notice effect (character image G1). As the precursor effect), it is possible to execute a first pattern advance notice effect in which the predetermined image acts on the start memory display and a second pattern advance notice effect in which the predetermined image does not affect the start memory display.

In the case of the present embodiment, the advance notice effect of the first pattern is the second type of precursor effect when the action possibility lottery is won, and the notice effect of the second pattern is the second type when the action possibility lottery is lost.
It is a type of precursory production.

Therefore, the character image G2 may or may not act on the hold display 633, and since the movement of the image (character image G2) that can act on the hold display 633 is not one pattern, the image that can act on the hold display 633. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the case of the present embodiment, the character image G2 moves to the action position and the start memory display (
Two patterns are provided, one is a pattern that acts on the hold display 633 and the changing hold display 643), and the other is a pattern in which the character image G2 does not move to the action position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to these patterns, a pattern in which the character image G2 moves to the action position but does not act on the start memory display (the bar is not swung down) may be provided.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a start memory display (hold display 633 or a variable hold display 64) in a predetermined advance notice effect (precursor effect).
It is possible to change the display mode of 3). It can be configured so that the rate at which the display mode of the start memory display changes in the notice effect of the first pattern is higher than the rate at which the display mode of the start memory display changes in the notice effect of the second pattern (FIG. 52 (d)). ) ~ (G))
..

With this configuration, whether or not the precursor effect is a precursor effect in which the display mode of the start memory display is easily changed depending on the pattern of the precursor effect (that is, by the movement of the image that can act on the start memory display). Can be suggested. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation at the stage when the player can recognize that the display mode of the start memory display is a precursory effect that is likely to change due to the suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved. .. Further, the player is not only in the final stage of whether or not the display mode of the start memory display is changed, but also in the intermediate stage of how the image (character image G2) that can act on the start memory display behaves. Because it can attract the interest of, it is possible to perform a highly interesting precursory production.

[Holding change production]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a hold display unit 630 as a hold change effect.
Hold change notice (hold change notice effect) that suggests a look-ahead result by changing the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the It is possible to execute a pending change effect during fluctuation that suggests the result or fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed by changing the display mode of.

For example, when the movable accessory 671 overlaps the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction (
That is, when the hold change effect is executed while the movable accessory 671 is located in front of the hold display unit), it is visually recognized that the display modes of the hold displays 633 and 643 are changed by the movable accessory 671. It may become impossible (difficult to see). However, in the present embodiment, it is invisible (difficult to see) whether or not the movable accessory 671 overlaps the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction, that is, the display mode of the hold display is changed. ), When the execution timing of the hold change effect arrives, the hold change effect is started.
The display mode of the hold display to be changed will be changed.

In FIG. 56A, even if the movable accessory 671 overlaps the hold display 633 (here, the hold display 633 at the right end) of the change target in the front-rear direction, the effect control device 300 can perform the hold change effect (in this case, the hold display 633).
Here, the hold change notice) is executed to change the display mode of the hold display 633 to be changed.

Of course, it is also possible to prohibit the execution of the hold change effect during the period in which the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the hold display units 630 and 640. However, in this configuration, due to the malfunction of the movable accessory 671, the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the hold display unit in the front-rear direction during the period in which the movable accessory 671 overlaps the hold display unit in the front-rear direction. When an inconvenience occurs, the player cannot enjoy the character movement effect, nor can he enjoy the hold change effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction, that is, regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671, the hold change effect is executed. When the timing arrives, the hold change effect is started to change the display modes of the hold displays 633 and 643 to be changed. As a result, the movable accessory 671
Even if it becomes impossible to enjoy the character movement effect due to the malfunction of the game, the hold change effect can be enjoyed, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Here, if the hold displays 633 and 643 are hidden by the movable accessory 671 and become invisible (difficult to see), there is a possibility that the accurate start memory number cannot be grasped even by looking at the displays on the hold display units 630 and 640. However, in the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are provided separately from the hold display units 630 and 640, the hold display is invisible (difficult to see). However, the exact number of start-up memories can be grasped.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the hold change effect is executed regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671, the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction during the execution of the hold change effect. The movable accessory 671 may change to a non-overlapping state, and the hold display unit 63
It may change from a state where it does not overlap with 0 and 640 back and forth to a state where it overlaps.

FIG. 56B shows the size of the movable accessory 671 in the display unit of the display device 41 (movable accessory 6).
This is an example of executing the hold change effect in an area wider than (the size when 71 is viewed from the front).
Specifically, as an effect image that enhances the effect of the hold change effect, the movable accessory 6 when viewed from the front
An image having a size protruding from 71 (effect image E, etc.) may be displayed.

As a result, the movable accessory 671 is in a state of overlapping the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction, and the display related to the hold change effect (hold display 633, 643 to be changed, hold display 633, or hold display 633).
, 643 Since at least a part of the image (effect image E, etc.) related to the change in the display mode is not hidden by the movable accessory, the player can recognize that the hold change effect is being executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56, only a part of the hold display 633, 643 of the change target is hidden by the movable accessory 671 and is invisible (difficult to see), but the hold display 633, 6 of the change target is hidden.
All of 43 may be hidden by a movable accessory 671 to make it invisible (difficult to see).

Further, as an effect image for enhancing the effect of the hold change effect, a character image (a predetermined character image related to the hold change effect) is displayed, and the character image is displayed on hold regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671. An effect acting on 643 may be performed.

Further, the operation time of the movable accessory 671 may be longer than the execution time of the hold change effect.
It may be short. Further, the operation time of the movable accessory 671 may be the same as the execution time of the hold change effect.

Further, instead of the movable accessory 671, a character image that can be superimposed and displayed may be displayed on the hold display units 630 and 640. In this case, the character image may be displayed on the front side of the hold display 633, 643, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display 633, 643.

When the character image is displayed in front of the hold display 633, 643, when the character image and the hold display 633, 643 overlap, the character image is used as the hold display 633,
The part of 643 that overlaps with the character image is hidden. On the other hand, when the character image is displayed behind the hold display 633, 643, when the character image and the hold display 633, 643 overlap, the hold display 633, 643 displays the hold display of the character image. The part that overlaps with 633 and 643 will be hidden.

Further, the movable accessory 671 is composed of a transparent or semi-transparent member, and the movable accessory 671 can be seen through to visually recognize how the display mode of the hold display 633 is changing and the display related to the hold change effect. It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, the movable accessory 671 may be provided with a hole or a gap so that the display mode of the hold display 633 or 643 can be changed or the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized from the hole or the gap. good.

FIG. 57 shows a movable accessory 672 that can be divided into a plurality of parts as a movable accessory that can overlap the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction. The movable accessory 672 is converted from a first state in which a gap is not formed between the parts (a state in which the parts are not cracked) to a second state in which a gap having a predetermined width is formed between the parts (a state in which the crack is completed). It may be possible.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 58, it is preferable that the execution period of the hold change effect overlaps with at least a part of the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 672 is in the crack completed state. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the display is suspended from the gap formed in the movable accessory 672 (that is, the gap formed during the period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 672 is not cracked). It is possible to visually recognize how the display modes of 633 and 643 are changing and the display related to the pending change effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the start timing of the hold change effect is set to be the same as the timing (t21) when the movable accessory 672 starts the conversion operation to the crack completed state. The start timing can be changed as appropriate, and is preferably set within a period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 672 is not cracked.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58, the end timing of the hold change effect is set within the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 672 is in the crack completed state, but the end timing of the hold change effect is appropriately set. The period (t21) that can be changed and the movable accessory 672 is in an unbroken state.
It is preferable to set it within ~ t25).

Further, when the movable accessory that can overlap the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction is the movable accessory 672 that can be converted into the unbroken state and the cracked completed state, the movable accessory 672 opens and closes (opening and closing operation). The position to perform the conversion operation to the crack completed state and the return operation to return to the unbroken state)
It may be determined based on the positions of the hold displays 633 and 643 to be changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, of the three hold displays 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630, the hold display 633 at the right end is easier to see when the movable accessory 672 is in the cracked completed state, and the hold display in the middle is displayed. 633 is easier to see when the movable accessory 672 is not cracked.

Therefore, for example, the position where the movable accessory 672 opens and closes is displayed as a hold display 633 to be changed.
By setting the position so that it overlaps the front and back, the hold display 6 is held from the gap formed in the movable accessory 672.
It is possible to visually recognize how the display mode of 33 is changing.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is obtained. When a special result is obtained, a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated.
The game machine 10 has a start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of a start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game, and a start memory display (hold display 633,) corresponding to the start memory. The start memory display control means (effect control device 30) that displays 643) in the start memory display area (hold display unit 630, hold digestion area 640) provided in the display unit of the display device 41.
Movable accessory 671 that can be converted into 0), a state located in front of the start memory display area (overlapping back and forth), and a state retracted from the front of the start memory display area (non-overlapping back and forth).
And. The start memory display control means can execute a start memory display change effect (hold change effect) that changes the display mode of the start memory display regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671.

Therefore, even if the movable accessory cannot be enjoyed due to a malfunction, the hold change effect can be enjoyed, and the hold change effect can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. When becomes, a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated. The game machine 10 has a start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of a start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game, and a start storage display area provided in the display unit of the display device 41. Movable that can be converted into a state of being located in front of (hold display unit 630, hold digestion area 640) (state of overlapping in front and back) and a state of retracting from the front of the start memory display area (state of not overlapping in front and back). The accessory 671 and a display control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display contents displayed on the display unit are provided. The display control means displays a start memory display (hold display 633, 643) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area, changes the display mode of the start memory display in a predetermined size area in the display unit, and changes the display mode of the start memory display. It is possible to execute a start memory display change effect (hold change effect) that displays an image related to the change (effect image E, etc.), and the predetermined size is larger than the size when viewed from the front of the movable accessory 671. (See (b) in FIG. 56).

Therefore, even if the movable accessory 671 is located in front of the hold display units 630 and 640, at least a part of the display related to the hold change effect is not hidden by the movable accessory. It can enhance the interest.

The predetermined size may be smaller than the display unit of the display device 41, or may be the same size as the display unit of the display device 41.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition is executed, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. When becomes, a special game state that gives the player a game value is generated. The game machine 10 has a start storage means (game control device 100) that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of a start condition and stores it as a start memory of a variable display game, and a start memory display (hold display 633) corresponding to the start memory. Is located in front of the start memory display control means (effect control device 300) and the start memory display area. It includes a movable accessory 672 that can be converted into a state (a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction), a state of retracting from the front of the start memory display area (a state of not overlapping in the front-rear direction), and a state of being retracted from the front.
The movable accessory 672 can be divided into a plurality of parts (parts), and a gap having a predetermined width is formed between the parts from the first state (unbroken state) in which no gap is formed between the parts. It is possible to convert to the second state (cracking completed state). The start memory display control means can execute a start memory display change effect (hold change effect) that changes the display mode of the start memory display, and the execution period (t21 to t23) of the start memory display change effect is a movable accessory. The 672 can be configured to overlap at least a portion of the second state period (t22-t24) (see FIG. 58).

Therefore, even when the movable accessory 672 is located in front of the hold display units 630 and 640, the display mode of the hold display 633 is changed from the gap (gap) formed in the movable accessory 672. Since the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the hold change effect.

[Pre-reading effect when the hold number command is abnormal (when the hold number is abnormal)]
59 to 60 show the results of control by the above-mentioned special figure 1 hold information setting process (FIG. 36A), special figure 2 hold information setting process (FIG. 36B), and look-ahead variable command processing (FIG. 38). It is a screen view.

FIG. 59A is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the look-ahead effect is canceled when there is an abnormality in the hold number command when hold occurs.

FIG. 59A (A) shows a situation in which the special figure variation display game is being executed in the variation display area 610. There are four special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory, first start memory), and three special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory), and the number of special figure 1 hold is displayed. A number 4 is shown on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650, and a number 3 is shown on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 that displays the special figure 2 hold number, and a total of seven hold displays 633 are displayed. For one of the hold display 633 (indicated by diagonal lines), the hold change notice in the suggestion mode is executed.

In the situation of FIG. 59A (A), the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) occurs, and the effect control device 30
When 0 is received from the game control device 100 (when the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead effect (notice effect) is set as shown in FIG. 59A (i). , Will be executed. The look-ahead effect when the hold occurs is, for example, drawn and set in step B1713 of the look-ahead variable command process (FIG. 38).

In FIG. 59A (i), a total of eight hold displays 633 are displayed, and the hold display 633a corresponding to the generated special figure 2 hold is displayed at the right end. As a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 2 hold, the hold change notice is executed, and the hold display 633a at the right end changes from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed in the manner of FIGS. 56 and 57 described above.

Further, in FIG. 59A (i), the character image 635 “extreme heat in the hold” is displayed as a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 2 hold. Further, although it is not a look-ahead effect, a predetermined display 636 “holding MAX” indicating that the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit of 8 (the number of holdings of special figure 1 and the number of holdings of special figure 2 have each reached the upper limit of 4). Is displayed as an effect.

In the situation of FIG. 59A (A), even if the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) occurs, the effect control device 300 receives the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2907) and the special figure 2 hold. 2 Special figure 2 When the number of holds exceeds the upper limit of 4 (when the result of B1701 is "Y" and the result of B1702 is "N"), the look-ahead effect is shown as shown in FIG. 59A (c). Notice effect) is not executed (not set). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the look-ahead effect even though the number of holds exceeds the upper limit.

In FIG. 59A (c), the hold change notice as a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 2 hold is not executed. It is not necessary to display the rightmost hold display 633a itself for the generated special figure 2 hold, but it increases corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (5 in this case) obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command. Hold display that is not related to look-ahead may be performed for the number of holds (2 in this case) that has been held (indicated by a dotted line). It should be noted that the hold change notice as a look-ahead effect for the hold display for the increased number of holds (here, 2) including the hold display for the generated special figure 2 hold is not executed.

Further, in FIG. 59A (c), the character image 635 “extreme heat in hold” as a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 2 hold is not displayed. Further, in order to indicate that there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number (5 in this case) obtained from the special figure 2 hold number command obtained from the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660. An error is displayed in a special display mode (with a circle) for a value that exceeds the upper limit of 4 and is normally impossible. As a result, the player can recognize that the hold number command is abnormal by looking at the error display. It is also possible to configure the special figure 2 hold number not to be displayed in order to prevent the player from being confused when the special figure 2 hold number obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4. be.

Note that FIG. 59A shows the case where the special figure 2 hold occurs, but the same applies to the case where the special figure 1 hold occurs.

FIG. 59B is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the look-ahead effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the hold number command when hold occurs.

FIG. 59B (E) shows a situation in which the special figure variation display game is being executed in the variation display area 610, as in FIG. 59 (A). There is one special figure 1 hold, one special figure 2 hold, and the number 1 on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 that displays the number of special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 that displays the number of special figure 2 hold. The number 1 is shown on the hold number display unit 660, and a total of two hold displays 633 are displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 59B (E), special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) occurs, and the effect control device 30
When 0 is received from the game control device 100 (when the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead effect (notice effect) is set as shown in FIG. 59B (O). , Will be executed. The look-ahead effect when the hold occurs is, for example, drawn and set in step B1713 of the look-ahead variable command process (FIG. 38).

In FIG. 59B (O), a total of three hold displays 633 are displayed, and the hold display 633a corresponding to the generated special figure 1 hold is displayed at the right end. As a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 1 hold, a hold change notice (look-ahead notice effect) is executed, and the hold display 633a at the right end changes from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice is shown in FIG. 56 above.
Or in the manner of FIG. 57. In addition, as a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 1 hold, the character image 635 "extreme heat in hold" is displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 59B (E), special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) occurs, and the effect control device 30
Even if 0 receives the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2907), the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less in the upper limit (the result of B1701 is "Y". "
And when the result of B1702 is "Y"), the look-ahead effect (notice effect) is executed (set) as shown in FIG. 59B (or). Therefore, the look-ahead effect is executed even if there is an abnormality in the hold number command, except in a special situation where the hold number exceeds the upper limit number. Then, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In FIG. 59B (or), the character image 635 as a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 1 hold.
"Intense heat in hold" is displayed. It should be noted that the hold display that is not related to the look-ahead may be performed by the number of holds (2 in this case) that has increased corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (3 in this case) acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command. (Indicated by the dotted line). Then, the hold change notice as a look-ahead effect for the hold display for the increased number of holds (here, 2) including the hold display for the generated special figure 1 hold is not executed. However, in another example, even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number obtained from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less, the increased number of holds (2 in this case). The hold display of is performed as usual (similar to the hold display of the solid line), and the hold change notice for the increased hold display (particularly the hold display for the special figure 1 hold that occurred this time) may be executed.

Further, in FIG. 59B (or), if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, the decoration special figure 1
Even if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the hold number command is 4 or less, the hold change notice for the increased hold display is not executed, but it is already started and executed before the reception of the decoration special figure 1 hold number command this time. The pending change notice may continue regardless of the abnormality of the pending number command.

In FIG. 59B (or), even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less, it is regarded as a normal command and the special figure is a special figure. 1
The number of holds (3 in this case) may be displayed. In addition, in order to indicate that there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold number (3 in this case) acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650. An error may be displayed in a special display mode (circled). Further, if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, even if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less, the special figure 1 hold number may not be displayed. Is.

Note that FIG. 59B shows the situation in which the special figure 1 hold occurs, but the same applies to the case where the special figure 2 hold occurs.

FIG. 60 is a modification of FIG. 59A. FIG. 60 (A) (I) is shown in FIG. 59A (A) (
I) is the same. However, in FIG. 60 (U'), when the effect control device 300 receives the abnormal decorative special figure 2 hold number command (A2907) and the special figure 2 hold number exceeds the upper limit number 4 (B17).
When the result of 01 is "Y" and the result of B1702 is "N"), not only the look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 2 hold is not executed, but also the look-ahead effect that has already been started and executed (the look-ahead effect currently being executed) is not executed. ) May end (B1717). For example, with respect to the hold display 633e (indicated by diagonal lines) for which the hold change notice has already been executed in FIG. 60 (a), the hold change notice may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the continuation of the pre-reading effect during execution despite the abnormal state in which the number of holds exceeds the upper limit. It should be noted that the suggestion effect (the effect suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game being executed, the variation pattern, etc.) by the variable pending display 643 (during digestion pending display) in the reserved digestion area 640 may be continued or terminated. good.

In addition, in FIG. 60 (U'), in order to prevent the player from being excessively discouraged, some of the look-ahead effects that have already been started (the look-ahead effects that are currently being executed) are finished. Some others may continue. For example, although the pending change notice is terminated, the continuous notice effect or the look-ahead zone effect may be continued.

In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 60, the effect control device 300 may determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect according to the gaming state and the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the hold that has occurred. .. For example, in the normal electric support state, winning of the second start winning opening of the normal variable winning device 37 occurs frequently. Therefore, when the holding number command is abnormal and the holding number is less than or equal to the upper limit, the special figure 2 that occurs. The look-ahead effect for the hold may be prohibited, and only the look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 1 hold may be executed (with respect to FIG. 59B (or)). For example, in the Fuden support state, if the hold number command is abnormal and the hold number exceeds the upper limit, the look-ahead effect for the hold that occurs at that time is not executed, but the player's expectation for the Fuden support state is expected. The look-ahead effect that has already been started and executed (the look-ahead effect that is currently being executed) may be continued in order to maintain it (with respect to FIG. 60 (u')).

Further, in FIGS. 59 to 60, the situation in which an abnormality has occurred in the hold number command (A2907) at the time of hold occurrence is shown, but as described below, the hold number command (A33) at the time of hold shift is shown.
The same applies to the situation where an abnormality occurs in 04, A3307).

FIG. 61A is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the look-ahead effect is canceled when there is an abnormality in the hold number commands (A3304, A3307) at the time of hold shift.

FIG. 61A (sa) shows a situation in which the stop symbol is displayed in the variable display areas 610 and 615 after the special figure 2 variable display game is finished. There are four special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory, first start memory), and three special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory), and the number of special figure 1 hold is displayed. A number 4 is shown on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650, and a number 3 is shown on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 that displays the special figure 2 hold number, and a total of seven hold displays 633 are displayed. For one of the hold display 633 (indicated by diagonal lines), the hold change notice in the suggestion mode is executed. In the reserved digestion area 640, the variable pending display 643 is hidden.

In the situation of FIG. 61A (sa), a hold shift (hold shift effect) in which the hold display 633 shifts to the next is executed, and the special figure 1 variable display game starts. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits the decorative special figure 1 hold number command to the effect control device 300 (A3304).
.. When the effect control device 300 receives the normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command, FIG. 61A ()
The look-ahead effect (notice effect) is executed as in. For example, the look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift
It is drawn and set in advance in step B1713 of the look-ahead variable command process (FIG. 38), and is executed at the time of hold shift (B2015).

In FIG. 61A, a total of 6 hold displays 633 are displayed, and the rightmost hold display 633a is displayed.
On the other hand, the hold change notice (look-ahead notice effect) is executed as the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift, and the display mode changes from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed with the above-mentioned precursor effect (FIGS. 46-47, etc.). The precursor effect can be set, for example, by the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41).

Further, in FIG. 61A (), the character image 635 "extreme heat in the hold" is displayed as a look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift for any of the holds.

In the situation shown in FIG. 61A, the effect control device 300 has an abnormal decoration.
When 3304) is received and the number of special figure 1 hold obtained from the special figure 1 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4, the look-ahead effect (notice effect) at the time of hold shift is executed as shown in FIG. 61A. Not done (prohibited by B2015 etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the look-ahead effect even though the number of holds exceeds the upper limit. Note that, in FIG. 61A, the pre-reading effect that has already been started and executed (the pre-reading effect that is currently being executed) may be terminated, as in FIG. 60 (u').

In FIG. 61A, the hold change notice as the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift is not executed. In addition, the hold display that is not related to the look-ahead may be performed by the number of holds (3 in this case) that has increased corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (6 in this case) acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command. (Indicated by the dotted line). It should be noted that the hold change notice as a look-ahead effect for the hold display for the increased number of holds (3 in this case) is not executed.

Further, in FIG. 61A, the character image 635 “extreme heat in hold” as a look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift is not displayed. Further, in order to indicate that there is an abnormality in the decorative special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold number (6 in this case) obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650. An error is displayed in a special display mode (with a circle) for a value that exceeds the upper limit of 4 and is normally impossible. As a result, the player can recognize that the hold number command is abnormal by looking at the error display. It is also possible to configure the special figure 1 hold number not to be displayed in order to prevent the player from being confused when the special figure 1 hold number obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4. be.

Note that FIG. 61A shows a situation in which an abnormality occurs in the decorative special figure 1 hold number command, but the same applies when an abnormality occurs in the decorative special figure 2 hold number command.

FIG. 61B is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the look-ahead effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the hold number command when hold occurs.

FIG. 61B (se) shows a situation in which the stop symbol is displayed in the fluctuation display areas 610 and 615 after the special figure 2 variation display game is finished, as in FIG. 61A (sa). Special figure 1 Hold is 1
There is one special figure 2 hold, and the number 1 is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 that displays the special figure 1 hold number, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 that displays the special figure 2 hold number. The number 1 is shown and a total of two hold displays 633 are displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 61B, a hold shift (hold shift effect) in which the hold display 633 shifts to the next is executed, and the special figure 1 variable display game starts. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (A3304) to the effect control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command, FIG. 61B (so)
A look-ahead effect (notice effect) at the time of a hold shift is executed as in. The look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift is, for example, a lottery in advance in step B1713 of the look-ahead variable command process (FIG. 38).
It is set and executed at the time of hold shift (B2015).

In FIG. 61B (so), a total of one hold display 633 is displayed, and the rightmost hold display 633a is displayed.
On the other hand, the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift is executed, and the display mode changes from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed with the above-mentioned precursor effect (FIGS. 46-47, etc.).

Further, in FIG. 61B (so), the look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift is executed by displaying the character image 635 "extreme heat in hold" with respect to the hold display 633a at the right end.

In the situation of FIG. 61B, even if the effect control device 300 receives the abnormal special figure 1 hold number command (A3304) when the hold shift (hold shift effect) is executed, the special figure 1 hold number Since the number of special figures 1 held from the command is 4 or less, the look-ahead effect (notice effect) at the time of hold shift is executed as shown in FIG. 61B (). Therefore, the look-ahead effect is executed even if there is an abnormality in the hold number command, except in a special situation where the hold number exceeds the upper limit number. Then, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In FIG. 61B (ta), at the time of the hold shift, the character image 635 “extreme heat in hold” as a look-ahead effect for the hold display 633a at the right end is displayed. In addition, a hold change notice as a look-ahead effect for the hold display 633a at the right end is executed. It should be noted that the number of holdings increased corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 1 (3 in this case) obtained from the abnormal special figure 1 holding number command (3 in this case).
However, the hold display that is not related to the look-ahead may be performed (indicated by the dotted line). However, in another example, even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number obtained from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less, the increased number of holds (3 in this case). The hold display of is performed as usual (similar to the hold display of the solid line).

In FIG. 61B (ta), even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less, it is regarded as a normal command and the special figure is a special figure. 1
The number of holds (3 in this case) may be displayed. In addition, in order to indicate that there is an abnormality in the decorative special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold number (3 in this case) acquired from the abnormal special figure 1 hold number command is special on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650. An error is displayed in a different display mode (circled). Further, even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is 4 or less, the special figure 1 hold number may not be displayed.

Note that FIG. 61B shows a case where an abnormality occurs in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, but the same applies to a case where an abnormality occurs in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command.

In FIGS. 59 to 61 described above, the effect control device 300 is the game control device 10.
Depending on the setting information regarding the game condition acquired from the setting information command transmitted from 0, it may be determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. In this way, the player has the pleasure of being able to guess the setting based on the execution of the look-ahead effect, and the interest in the game is improved. For example, FIG.
In 9A (U) and FIG. 61A (S), the look-ahead effect is executed in setting 3 (high setting), and setting 1 (
The look-ahead effect may not be executed in the low setting) and the setting 2 (intermediate setting). Further, for example, in FIG. 59B (or) and FIG. 61B (ta), the look-ahead effect is not executed in the setting 3 (high setting) and the setting 2 (intermediate setting), and the look-ahead effect is executed in the setting 1 (low setting). You may try to do it. Similarly, in FIG. 59A (i), FIG. 59B (o), FIG. 61A (), and FIG. 61B (so), the pre-reading effect (for example, character image 63) is set in setting 3 (high setting) and setting 2 (intermediate setting).
5 "Display of intense heat in hold") may be executed, and pre-reading effect (for example, display of character image 635 "Intense heat in hold") may not be executed in setting 1 (low setting).

Further, in FIGS. 59 to 61, it is possible to change the upper limit of the number of reservations to a predetermined number. For example, even if the hold number command is abnormal, if the hold number acquired from the hold number command is less than or equal to a predetermined number, the look-ahead effect is executed, and if the hold number exceeds the predetermined number, the look-ahead effect is not executed. good. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the situation where the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect decreases.
It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following configuration may be adopted as a modification of the above first embodiment.

Hold number When the start memory number (hold number) indicated by the command exceeds the upper limit number (4 in this case),
It is not necessary to consider that the hold number command is abnormal and execute the look-ahead effect (notice effect) based on the look-ahead variable command (that is, the determination result of the preliminary determination). On the other hand, when the start storage number indicated by the hold number command is not more than the upper limit number (4 in this case), the hold number command may be regarded as normal and the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead variable command may be executed. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 may be omitted, the look-ahead effect can be set when the result of step B1702 is “Y”, and the look-ahead effect may not be set when the result of step B1702 is “N”. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, when the start storage number (hold number) indicated by the hold number command is less than the lower limit number (1 in this case), the hold number command is regarded as abnormal and the look-ahead variable command (that is, the judgment result of the preliminary judgment). It is not necessary to execute the look-ahead effect (notice effect) based on. On the other hand, when the start storage number indicated by the hold number command is equal to or greater than the lower limit number (1 in this case), the hold number command may be regarded as normal and the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead variable command may be executed. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 is omitted, and in step B1702, it is determined whether or not the start storage number (holding number) indicated by the hold number command is equal to or greater than the lower limit number. And step B170
When the result of step 2 is "Y", the look-ahead effect can be set, and the result of step B1702 is "N".
In the case of "", the pre-reading effect may not be set. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Also, if the start memory number (holding number) indicated by the hold number command is less than the lower limit number (1 in this case) or exceeds the upper limit number (4 in this case), the hold number command is regarded as abnormal. It is not necessary to execute the look-ahead effect (notice effect) based on the look-ahead variable command. On the other hand, when the start storage number indicated by the hold number command is equal to or less than the lower limit number and is less than or equal to the upper limit number (when the number is within the range (1 to 4) defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value), the hold number command is considered to be normal. It may be regarded as possible to execute the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead variable command. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 is omitted, and in step B1702, the start storage number indicated by the hold number command (
It is determined whether or not the number of holds) is equal to or greater than the lower limit and less than or equal to the upper limit. And step B17
When the result of 02 is "Y", the look-ahead effect can be set, and the result of step B1702 is "
In the case of "N", the pre-reading effect may not be set. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
In the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of starting conditions (winning in a starting winning area, etc.) and A production control means (effect control device 3) capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game.
00) is provided, and when the result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store up to a predetermined upper limit of start memory, which is the right to execute the variable display game, based on the establishment of the start condition. The pre-determination means (for example, the special figure reservation information determination process of the game control device 100) uses the execution information of the variation display game based on the start memory stored by the start storage means to execute the variation display game based on the start memory. Also judge before. The game control means has start storage number information (holding number command) indicating the starting storage number (holding number) stored by the starting storage means.
Can be transmitted to the effect control means.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) is a notice effect (effect control device 300) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.
Look-ahead effect) can be executed. When there is an abnormality in the received start memory number information (holding number command), the effect control means (effect control device 300) gives a notice effect (if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information exceeds the upper limit number). While the look-ahead effect) is not executed, if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information is equal to or less than the upper limit number, the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) can be executed. For example, when the number of start memories indicated by the start memory number information (hold number command) increases or decreases by 2 or more at a time, or
When the effect control means (effect control device 300) receives only the determination result of the pre-determination means, although the start memory number information (hold number command) is not received, the received start memory number information (hold number command) is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Missing start memory count information (hold count command) can cause such anomalies.

As described above, even if there is an abnormality in the received start storage number information (holding number command), the effect control means (effect control device 300) is in advance if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information is equal to or less than the upper limit number. It is possible to execute a notice effect (look-ahead effect) based on the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced due to an abnormality in the hold number command, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. If the start memory number information (holding number command) is abnormal and the advance notice effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means is not always executed, the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect is reduced.

On the other hand, when the received start storage number information (holding number command) is abnormal, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines that the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information exceeds the upper limit.
The advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the look-ahead effect even though the starting memory number exceeds the upper limit number.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is
If there is no abnormality in the received start memory number information, or if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information is equal to or less than the upper limit even if there is an abnormality in the received start memory number information, the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) ) Is feasible. The effect control means is the received start storage number information (holding number command).
If there is an abnormality and the number of start memories indicated by the start memory information exceeds the upper limit, the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) that has already been executed before receiving the start memory information is stopped. good. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the continuation of the pre-reading effect during execution despite the abnormal state in which the starting memory number exceeds the upper limit number.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a setting changing means (setting changing device 43) capable of changing settings related to gaming conditions, and can execute a advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) according to the setting by the setting changing means. Is. Therefore, the player has the pleasure of being able to guess the setting based on the execution of the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect), and the interest in the game is improved.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66A. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment.

[Timing chart of special decorative symbols and reduced decorative symbols]
FIG. 62 shows, in the second embodiment, the hold display 633 (special figure hold display), the decorative special symbol (identification information, the decorative first symbol, the large symbol), and the decorative reduced symbol (identification information, the decorative second symbol, small). It is a timing chart which shows the change of the display mode with the passage of time.

The decorative special symbol has a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B,) provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, as shown in the screen transition diagram described later with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66A. It is displayed in a plurality of columns in the middle region 610C). Specifically, in each variable display area 610, the left area 610A is decorated with the first symbol A (large left symbol, first special symbol).
However, in the right area 610B, the decorative first symbol B (large right symbol, second special symbol) is in the middle region 610C.
The decoration 1st design C (medium and large design, 3rd special design) is enlarged (main display, normal display)
It is displayed in a variable manner.

The decorative reduced symbol is a special symbol smaller than the decorative special symbol, and is provided in the variable display area 615 provided on the right side of the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in the screen transition diagram described later with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66A. , It is displayed in a variable manner (reduced display) so that three are lined up one above the other. Specifically, in the variable display area 615, the decorative reduced symbol arranged above is the decorative second symbol A (upper small symbol), and the decorative reduced symbol arranged below is the decorative second symbol B (lower small symbol). The decorative reduced symbol arranged inside is the decorative second symbol C (small and medium-sized symbol).

The mode of the variable display of the decorative special symbol and the decorative reduced symbol is set, for example, in step B2017 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41) executed by the effect control device 300.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description of the hold display 633 and the timing chart of the decorative special symbol and the decorative reduced symbol will be continued. From time t0 to time t3 in FIG. 62, the total number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold is in the normal game state (normal state) in which no special game state (specific game state or special game state) has occurred. This is the timing from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation when the number of holds (the number of start memories, the number of special figure holds) has not reached the upper limit (for example, 8). In the time saving state or the probability change state, the time t0 to the time t3 may be set to be the timing from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation when there is no hold number.

At time t0, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C start to fluctuate, respectively. At time t0, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a normal variation mode (normal variation, normal variation pattern) in which the decorative special symbols are scrolled one after another in the vertical direction to change. The decorative second symbols A to C are variablely displayed in a variable manner in which the displayed decorative reduced symbols are switched in order on the spot without scrolling to the next decorative reduced symbol.

At time t1, the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped (variable stop) as a substantially stopped state in which the first symbol A is not fixed.
At time t2, the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped as a substantially stopped state in which the first symbol B is not fixed.

When the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped at time t1, for example, the decorative first symbol A becomes a swaying fluctuation in which the temporarily stopped symbol sways with a minute sway width. In addition, the decoration 1st that is scrolled back and forth (up and down) of the temporarily stopped decoration 1st symbol A and displayed in the same row as the decoration 1st symbol A.
The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the symbol A is hidden. The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol A is displayed in one direction (for example, in the vertical direction) in the display screen in the same row as the decorative first symbol A (FIG. 63). -See FIG. 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction with respect to the decorative first symbol A.

When the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped at time t2, the decorative first symbol B also swings and fluctuates. In addition, the temporarily stopped decorative first symbol B is scrolled back and forth, and the decorative first symbol B is used.
The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol B displayed in the same row as is hidden. The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol B is displayed in one direction (for example, in the vertical direction) in the display screen in the same row as the decorative first symbol B (FIG. 63). -See FIG. 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction with respect to the decorative first symbol B. note that,
The decorative first symbol C that has not been temporarily stopped is continuously displayed in a variable manner together with the decorative second symbols A to C (decorated reduced symbols).

At time t3, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C are stopped (variable stop) as a fixed stop state. At time t3, the first decorative symbol A and the first decorative symbol B are
The temporarily stopped symbol becomes the symbol that is finally stopped as it is. Further, when the first decorative symbol C and the second decorative symbols A to C are stopped, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a fixed stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game. At that time, the symbols displayed by scrolling before and after the decorative first symbol C are hidden. The symbol (± 1 symbol) immediately before or after the decorative first symbol C is displayed in one direction (for example, in the vertical direction) in the display screen in the same row as the decorative first symbol C (FIG. 63). -See FIG. 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction with respect to the decorative first symbol C.

Next, from time t4 to time t5, the maximum number of holdings is the maximum number (for example, 8) in the normal gaming state.
This is the timing from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation when the value is reached. In the time saving state or the probability change state, the time t4 to the time t5 may be set to be the timing from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation when the number of holdings is one or more.

At time t4, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C start to fluctuate with shortened fluctuations that fluctuate in a shorter time than the normal fluctuations. At time t4, decoration first symbols A to C
Is displayed in a variable manner, the symbols (± 1 symbol) before and after one of the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed. The decoration second symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner in which the decoration reduction symbols are changed in order so as to be switched to the next decoration reduction symbols on the spot.

At time t5, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C are stopped. In the shortened variation, not only the first decorative symbols C and the second decorative symbols A to C, but also the first decorative symbols A and B are at time t.
In No. 5, the variable display is performed without a temporary stop until the main stop. After that, when the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C are stopped at time t5, the predetermined symbols are displayed as the stopped symbols determined as the result mode of the special symbol variation display game. At that time, decoration first
± 1 symbols that are scrolled back and forth between symbols A to C are hidden.

Time t6 to time t9 are normal reach fluctuations (N reach fluctuations) in the normal gaming state.
This is the timing from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation in the case of the reach state. note that,
Even in the time saving state or the probability change state, the time t6 to the time t9 can be set so as to be the same timing as in the case of the reach state in which the N reach variation in the normal game state occurs.

At time t6, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C start to fluctuate in a fluctuation pattern that is an N reach fluctuation, respectively. At time t6, when the first decorative symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner, ± 1 symbols before and after the first decorative symbols A to C are displayed, and the second decorative symbols A to C are reduced in decoration. It is displayed in a variable manner that changes in order on the spot without scrolling the symbol.

At time t7, ± 1 symbol scrolling before and after the decorative first symbol A is hidden in one direction (for example, in the vertical direction) in the display screen, and then the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped.

At time t8, ± 1 symbol scrolling before and after the decorative first symbol B is hidden in one direction (for example, in the vertical direction) in the display screen, and then the decorative first symbol B becomes the decorative first symbol A. It becomes the same decoration special pattern as, and is temporarily stopped, and it becomes a reach state.

At time t9, the symbols scrolling before and after the decoration 1st symbol C in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen are hidden, and then the decoration 1st symbol C and the decoration 2nd symbol A are hidden.
~ C is finally stopped. In addition, the first decorative symbols A and B that have been temporarily stopped are also stopped.

[Example of screen transition when the number of holds has not reached the upper limit]
FIG. 63 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment, and is a total number of reservations which is the total of the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 in the normal gaming state. (
This is an example of screen transition of the entire game when the number of start memories and the number of reserved special figures) has not reached the upper limit (for example, 8). When each of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number reaches the respective upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces), the total hold number also reaches the upper limit number (for example, 8 pieces).

FIG. 63 (sa) is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. The first decorative symbol B is enlarged and the first decorative symbol C is enlarged and displayed in the middle region 610C, and the first decorative symbol C is changed and displayed in a normal variation mode. Similarly, in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C, special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbol) are variablely displayed (reduced display). NS. The special decorative symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) of the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen are also the variable display area 61 at the right end of the display screen.
The decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C) displayed in 5 are also variable displays performed by the same special figure variable display game, and usually the stop symbols are the same, but different stop symbols are used. good.

In the following figures, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variablely displayed in a normal variation mode, the variable display first decorative symbols A to C are indicated by “↓”.

At the upper left corner of the display screen, a special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are displayed. The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 displays a number “1” indicating the number of special figure 1 hold, which is the number of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold), and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 displays the number “1”. , The number "1" indicating the number of special figure 2 hold, which is the number of the second start memory (special figure 2 hold), is displayed. note that,
The first start memory and the second start memory are alternately stored up to a maximum of 4 each (up to a total of 8), and are digested in order from the oldest start memory. Further, in FIG. 63 (sa), the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first start memory, which is the oldest start memory.

On the hold display unit 630 displayed at the lower center of the display screen, a hold display 633 (special figure hold display) indicating undigested first start memory or second start memory is displayed. The hold display unit 630 alternately displays the hold display 633 indicating the first start memory and the hold display 633 indicating the second start memory, and up to eight hold displays 633 can be displayed. In FIG. 63 (), two hold display 633s are displayed on the hold display unit 630.

Further, a hold digestion area 640 (specific display part, changing hold display area) is displayed next to the hold display part 630 at the lower center of the display screen. A pedestal is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. On the pedestal of the hold digestion area 640, a special figure change hold display (special figure digestion hold display) corresponding to the running (digesting) special figure change display game is displayed.

FIG. 63 () is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the temporary stop as a substantially stopped state in which the decorative first symbol A which is variablely displayed in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 is not fixed. In the right region 610B and the middle region 610C of the variation display area 610, the variation display of the decorative special symbol continues in the normal variation mode. In the left area 610A, "2" of the first decorative symbol A is variably displayed. Below the left region 610A, a left front region 611A in which the symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decorative first symbol A is variablely displayed is provided as a part of the front variable display region 611.

The front variable display area 611 is provided below the variable display area 610, and is one of the left front area 611A on which the symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decorative first symbol A is displayed and the decorative first symbol B. The right front area 611B where the previous symbol (-1 symbol) is displayed, and the symbol (-1) immediately before the decorative first symbol C.
It is composed of a middle front area 611C on which a symbol) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 63 (), immediately before the first decorative symbol A of the left region 610A temporarily stops, the left front region 611A located in the same row as the left region 610A has the − of the first decorative symbol A.
"1" is displayed in a variable manner as one symbol. In the right region 610B and the middle region 610C, the decorative first symbols B and C continue to display fluctuations (“↓”) in the normal fluctuation mode without temporarily stopping, and also in the right front region 611B and the middle front region 611C. The symbols in front of the first ornamental symbols B and C are displayed in a variable manner (not shown).

FIG. 63 shows the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 and then the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B. be. In the left region 610A, "2" of the first decorative symbol A is in a temporarily stopped state. Further, the -1 symbol (“1”) of the decorative first symbol A displayed in the left front area 611A is hidden immediately before the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A. As a result, the hold display and the effect image become easier to see and stand out without being disturbed by the -1 symbol. That is, the -1 symbol (“1”) of the decorative first symbol A is
The decoration "2" of the first symbol A is hidden (erased) before a predetermined time of the temporary stop timing. For example, at a predetermined time, "2" of the first decorative symbol A is located at the upper part of the display screen ((of FIG. 63).
It is a time shorter than the time for moving from the temporary stop position (position of (S) in FIG. 63). Similarly, the symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the special decorative symbol A is hidden immediately before the first decorative symbol A is temporarily stopped (it is not displayed from the beginning, or if it is displayed, it is deleted). do)
..

It should be noted that the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is not limited to the mode of being hidden, but is set to be displayed in a state in which the transparency is changed to make it more difficult to see (for example, the transparency is increased) than the decorative first symbol A. You can also do it. In addition, the first decoration displayed in a state that is difficult to see immediately before the temporary stop of the first decoration design A.
The -1 symbol of the symbol A may be hidden at the same time as the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A.

The decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) of the variable display area 610 in the temporarily stopped state are, for example,
It is a stop mode in which the swaying fluctuation fluctuates so as to gently sway with the predetermined symbol. note that,
The decorative special symbol in the temporary stop state is not limited to the stop mode in which the swing fluctuates, and may be another stop mode as long as it is not the stop mode in which the main stop is performed as the fixed stop state. For example, a temporary stop state is set in which one or two special decorative symbols (for example, the first decorative symbols A and B) are stopped before all the special decorative symbols (first decorative symbols A to C) are stopped. May be.

In the right area 610B of the variable display area 610, "5" is displayed as a decorative special symbol immediately before the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped, and in the right front area 611B below the right area 610B, the decorative first symbol B is displayed. "4" is displayed as the -1 symbol of. In the middle region 610C, the decoration first symbol C does not stop and continues the fluctuation display (“↓”) in the normal fluctuation mode. Further, in the middle region 610C of the variation display area 610, the variation display of the decorative first symbol C continues in the normal variation mode.

FIG. 63 shows the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol C is temporarily stopped in the middle region 610C after the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right region 610B of the variable display area 610. be. In the left area 610A, "2" of the decorative first symbol A is in the temporary stop state, and the right area 6
In 10B, "5" of the first decorative symbol B is in the temporarily stopped state. In addition, the right front area 611
The -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B displayed on B is hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped. As a result, the hold display and the effect image become easier to see and stand out without being disturbed by the -1 symbol.

That is, the -1 symbol (“4”) of the first decorative symbol B is hidden (erased) before a predetermined time when the “5” of the first decorative symbol B is temporarily stopped. For example, for a predetermined time, the decoration first
"5" of symbol B is from the position of the upper part of the display screen (position of (su) in FIG. 63) to the temporary stop position (FIG. 63).
It is a shorter time than the time to move to (the position of). Further, the predetermined time for the -1 symbol of the first decorative symbol B may be different from that for the -1 symbol of the first decorative symbol A. It is also possible to configure the -1 symbol (“4”) to be hidden (erased) at the timing when it overlaps with the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 643, or at the timing when it touches the lower end of the display screen.

Similarly, the symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative special symbol B is hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped.

It should be noted that the -1 symbol of the decoration 1st symbol B is displayed in a state in which it is harder to see than the decoration 1st symbol B immediately before the temporary stop of the decoration 1st symbol B, like the -1 symbol of the decoration 1st symbol A. And decoration 1st design B
May be hidden at the same time as the temporary stop of.

In the middle area 610C, "4" is displayed as a special decorative symbol immediately before the first decorative symbol C stops, and in the middle front region 611C below the middle region 610C, the -1 symbol of the first decorative symbol C is displayed. "3" is displayed as.

In FIG. 63, the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are shown.
The decorative reduced symbol of is the display screen of the display device 41 when the main stop is performed as a fixed stop state. The -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C displayed in the middle front region 611C is the variable display region 6.
10 decorations The first symbols A to C and the decoration reduction symbols in the variable display area 615 are all hidden immediately before the main stop. As a result, the hold display and the effect image become easier to see and stand out without being disturbed by the -1 symbol.

That is, the -1 symbol (“3”) of the first decorative symbol C is hidden (erased) before the predetermined time when the “4” of the first decorative symbol C is stopped. For example, for a predetermined time, the decoration first
"4" of the symbol C is from the position at the top of the display screen (the position of (se) in FIG. 63) to the main stop position (FIG. 63).
It is a shorter time than the time to move to (the position). Further, the predetermined time in the case of the main stop may be different from the case of the temporary stop. It should be noted that the -1 symbol can be hidden (erased) at the timing when it overlaps with the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 643, or at the timing when it touches the lower end of the display screen.

Similarly, the symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the special decorative symbol C is hidden immediately before the first decorative symbol C stops (it is not displayed from the beginning, or if it is displayed, it is deleted. do).

It should be noted that the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is displayed in a state that is harder to see than the decorative first symbol C immediately before the main stop of the decorative first symbol C, and is not displayed at the same time as the main stop of the decorative first symbol C. It may be displayed. Further, the changing hold display 643 corresponding to the running special figure change display game displayed in the hold digestion area 640 is digested and hidden when the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration reduction symbol are stopped. Become.

FIG. 63 (ta) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbols. When the special figure 2 variation display game is started as the next special figure variation display game based on the oldest start memory among the remaining start memories, the display positions of the hold display 633s on the hold display unit 630 are adjacent to each other. Special figure 2 displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 while being moved to the display position (hold shift)
The number indicating the number of holds is switched from "1" to "0". The number indicating the number of special figure 1 reserved displayed on the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 remains “1”.

The hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display unit 630 is erased from the hold display unit 630.
The changing hold display 643 corresponding to the erased hold display 633 is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 in a predetermined manner (as arranged on a pedestal) (to the hold digestion area 640 of the hold display 633). Hold shift). By executing the hold shift of the hold display 633 to the hold digestion area 640 in this way, the hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display unit 630 is changed.
It appears that it has moved from the hold display unit 630 to the hold digestion area 640. Then, only one hold display 633 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is displayed on the hold display unit 630.

When the next special symbol variable display game is started, the symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbols A to C) in the variable display area 610 and the symbol after the decorative special symbol are started. Design (+1)
(Symbol) is displayed (± 1 symbol is displayed), and the fluctuation starts. The decorative special symbol and its ± 1 symbol are displayed in a row in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen.

The +1 symbol of the decorative special symbol is the post-variable display area 6 provided above the variable display area 610.
It is displayed in 12. In the rear variable display area 612, the left rear area 612A on which the symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative first symbol A is displayed, and the symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative first symbol B are displayed. It is composed of a right rear region 612B and a middle rear region 612C on which a symbol (+1 symbol) immediately after the decorative first symbol C is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 63 (), the -1 symbol of the decorative special symbol is displayed in the pre-variable display area 611 provided below the variable display area 610, and the +1 symbol is displayed above the variable display area 610. After being provided, it is displayed in the variable display area 612.

Specifically, in the left front area 611A, "1" is used as the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A ("2").
A part of "3" is displayed as a +1 symbol in the left rear area 612A. Further, a part of "4" is displayed as a -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B ("5") in the right front area 611B, and a part of "6" is displayed as a +1 symbol in the right rear area 612B. NS. Middle front area 61
A part of "3" is displayed as a -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C ("4") in 1C, and a part of "5" is displayed as a +1 symbol in the middle and rear region 612C.

Actually, as shown in FIG. 63 (), a part of the front variation display area 611 and the rear variation display area 612 is displayed according to the position of the fluctuating decorative special symbol. However, the enlargement ratio (size) of the enlarged display of the special decorative symbol may be changed so that all ± 1 symbols are displayed.

[Example of screen transition when the number of holds has reached the upper limit]
FIG. 64 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment, and the total number of holds (the number of start memories, the number of special figures held) is the upper limit (the number of start memories, the number of special figures held) in the normal gaming state. For example, it is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the number has reached 8). In the following description of FIGS. 64 to 66A, the description overlapping with FIG. 63 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 64 (C) is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display. (Chi) of Fig. 64
Then, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed with the total number of holdings accumulated up to the upper limit.
Therefore, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 at the upper left corner of the display screen displays the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 hold number, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 indicates the special figure 2 hold number. The number "4" is displayed, and the total is the upper limit of 8. In addition, eight hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630 at the lower center of the display screen.

In FIG. 64, the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are shown.
The decorative reduced symbol is the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the main stop. When the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit, shortening fluctuation or ultra-shortening fluctuation is executed in order to shorten the fluctuation time, and all of the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration reduction symbols are stopped at the same time. .. Therefore, when the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit, the decoration first symbols A and B are not temporarily stopped.

Immediately before the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbols stop, as shown in (1) of FIG. 64, "2" is variablely displayed as the decorative first symbol A in the left area 610A, and the left front area. 6
In 11A, "1" is variablely displayed as -1 symbol of the first decorative symbol A. Right area 610
In B, "5" is variably displayed as the first decorative symbol B, and in the right front area 611B, "4" is variably displayed as -1 symbol of the first decorative symbol B. In the middle area 610C, "4" is variablely displayed as the decorative first symbol C, and in the middle front area 611C, "3" is displayed as the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C.
Is displayed in a variable manner.

In FIG. 64, the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are shown.
The decorative reduced symbol is the display screen of the display device 41 when the main stop is performed. Pre-variation display area 6
Each symbol (each -1 symbol) immediately before the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) displayed in 11 (left front area 611A, right front area 611B, middle front area 611C) is a variable display area. 61
The decorations of 0 The first symbols A to C and the decoration reduction symbols of the variable display area 615 are all hidden immediately before the main stop. As a result, the hold display and the effect image become easier to see and stand out without being disturbed by each -1 symbol.

That is, each -1 symbol of the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) is hidden (erased) at a predetermined time before the timing when the decorative special symbol is finally stopped. For example, for a predetermined time, the special decorative symbol (decorative first symbols A to C) moves from the position at the top of the display screen (position of (tsu) in FIG. 64) to the main stop position (position of (te) in FIG. 64). It is a shorter time than the time to do.

It is also possible to configure each -1 symbol to be hidden (erased) at the timing when it overlaps with the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 643. It is also possible to configure each -1 symbol to be hidden (erased) at the timing when it touches the lower end of the display screen.

Similarly, each symbol (each +1 symbol) one after the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbols A to C)
Is hidden just before all the first decorative symbols are stopped (it is not displayed from the beginning, or if it is displayed, it is deleted).

(And) in FIG. 64 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main stop of the first decorative symbols A to C and the reduced decorative symbols. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, each hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630
Is shifted to hold, and the number indicating the number of special figure 2 hold displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is switched from "4" to "3". The number indicating the number of special figure 1 reserved displayed on the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 remains “4”.

Further, the hold shift of the hold display 633 to the hold digestion area 640 is executed, and the hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display unit 630 is changed from the hold display unit 630 to the hold digestion area 640.
It moves to and becomes the pending display 643 during fluctuation. The number of hold displays 633 of the hold display unit 630 is changed from 8 to 7.

When the next special figure variation display game is started, the symbols before and after one of the decoration special symbols (decoration first symbols A to C) in the variation display area 610 are the same as when the total number of holdings has not reached the upper limit. (± 1
The design) is displayed and the fluctuation starts.

Then, as shown in (a) of FIG. 64, the following special figure variation display game is executed. FIG. 64
(Na) is a display screen of the display device 41 during execution of the next special figure variation display game.

Even if the total number of holdings reaches the upper limit, if the predetermined number is specified, the normal variation shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 may be executed without executing the shortening variation (ultra-shortening variation). For example, the first special figure fluctuation display game (first rotation of the electric support state) when the time saving state (normal power support state, electric support state) is reached, and the last special figure just before the end of the time saving state. In the fluctuation display game (last first rotation in the electric support state), normal fluctuation can be executed even when the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit.

In addition, the first special figure variation display game (for example, when the mode or stage changes at the 50th number of electric support) when the variation pattern or variation effect in the time saving state changes significantly, or the variation pattern or variation effect in the normal gaming state. In the first special figure fluctuation display game when the number changes significantly (for example, the first rotation when the mode or stage changes), it is possible to execute normal fluctuation even when the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit. can.

[Example of screen transition when reach state occurs in normal state]
FIG. 65A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the reach state occurs in the normal game state.

FIG. 65A (ni) is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display. Of FIG. 65A
In (2), the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed with a total of 3 pending numbers accumulated.
Therefore, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 at the upper left corner of the display screen displays the number “2” indicating the special figure 1 hold number, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 indicates the special figure 2 hold number. The number "1" is displayed, and the total is 3. Further, three hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630 at the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 65A (nu) is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol A, which is variablely displayed in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610, temporarily stops. When a reach state occurs, -1 of the decorative first symbol A immediately before the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A during the variable display.
The design is hidden. In the left area 610A of the variable display area 610, "2" is displayed as a special decorative symbol immediately before the first decorative symbol A temporarily stops.

The timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is hidden (erased) differs between the case where the reach state occurs (FIG. 65A) and the case where the reach state does not occur (FIG. 63).
For example, in FIG. 65A, for example, the timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is hidden is
The timing may be such that all or part of "2" of the first symbol A is displayed on the display screen.
This can suggest that a reach state occurs. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped (whether it is not displayed from the beginning or not).
If it is displayed, delete it).

FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol A is temporarily stopped in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 and then the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B. be. In the left area 610A, "2" of the decoration first symbol A is in a temporary stop state, and the decoration first
± 1 symbol (“1”, “3”) of symbol A is hidden. When a reach state occurs, the decoration first symbol B is displayed even during the variable display of the right area 610B as in the left area 610A.
Immediately before the temporary stop, the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is hidden. Variable display area 610
In the right area 610B of the above, "2" is displayed as a special decorative symbol immediately before the first decorative symbol B temporarily stops.

The timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is hidden (erased) differs depending on whether the reach state occurs (FIG. 65A) or the reach state does not occur (FIG. 63).
For example, in FIG. 65A, the timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is hidden is the decorative first symbol.
The timing may be such that all or part of "2" of the symbol B is displayed on the display screen. This can suggest that a reach state occurs. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped (it is not displayed from the beginning, or if it is displayed, it is deleted).

FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B of the variable display area 610 and a reach state occurs. In the right area 610B, "2" of the decorative first symbol B is in a temporarily stopped state like the decorative first symbol A of the left area 610A, and ± 1 symbol ("1", "3" of the decorative first symbol A. ") Is hidden. Further, the reach effect is executed when the reach state occurs, and for example, the character "reach" can be displayed on the display screen by the reach effect as shown in () of FIG. 65A.

(H) in FIG. 65A is the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 61.
The decorative reduced symbol of 5 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the main stop is performed. Middle front area 611
The -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C (“3”) displayed on C is immediately before all the decorative reduced symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 and the decorative reduced symbols in the variable display area 615 are stopped. , Hidden. For example, the timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is hidden (erased) may be the timing at which all or part of "3" of the decorative first symbol C is displayed on the display screen. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol C stops (it is not displayed from the beginning, or if it is displayed, it is deleted).

(H) of FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol. When the special figure 1 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, each hold display 63 on the hold display unit 630
As 3 is held and shifted, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 held displayed on the special figure 1 held number display unit 650 is switched from "2" to "1". The number indicating the number of special figures 2 held displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 remains "1".

Further, the hold shift of the hold display 633 to the hold digestion area 640 is executed, and the hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display unit 630 is changed from the hold display unit 630 to the hold digestion area 640.
Move to. The number of hold displays 633 of the hold display unit 630 is changed from three to two.

When the next special symbol variation display game is started, the symbols (± 1 symbol) before and after one of the decoration special symbols (decoration first symbols A to C) in the variation display area 610 are displayed, and the variation is started. The decorative special symbol and its ± 1 symbol are displayed in the same row in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen.

[Screen transition example 1 when pseudo continuous effect occurs]
FIG. 65B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment, and is an example of screen transitions of the entire game when a pseudo continuous effect occurs.

(Nu') in FIG. 65B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous effect occurs from (ni) in FIG. 65A, and the variation display is performed in the left area 610A of the variation display area 610. This is a display screen when the decorative first symbol A (“5”) is temporarily stopped.

In (nu') of FIG. 65B, when the decoration first symbol A is temporarily stopped in the left area 610A, the decoration first
The -1 symbol of symbol A is hidden. On the other hand, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is the main stop symbol (""
6 ”) (see (fu') in Fig. 65B), +1 symbol of the first decorative symbol A (“6 ”)
) Is not hidden, but a part of it is displayed on the display screen.

(Ne') in FIG. 65B is a right area 6 of the variable display area 610 when a pseudo continuous effect occurs.
Display device 41 when the decorative first symbol B (“5”), which is variablely displayed at 10B, temporarily stops.
It is a display screen of. The first decorative symbol A (“5”) and the first decorative symbol B (“5”) are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped. When the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B, the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is also hidden and the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is hidden in the same manner as the decorative first symbol A of the left area 610A. A part of ("6") is continuously displayed. The display of the +1 symbol of the decoration first symbol B is continued because the +1 symbol becomes the main stop symbol (“6”) (FIG. 65B).
See (fu')). In addition, the decoration first symbol C of the middle region 610C is a symbol dedicated to the pseudo-ream (“ream”).
) Is displayed in a variable manner, and "3" is displayed in a variable manner in the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C.

(') In FIG. 65B is a display of the display device 41 when the first unit variation display is completed by the pseudo continuous effect and the decorative first symbols A to C are pseudo-stop display (temporary stop display). It is a screen.
When the decorative first symbols A to C are temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous effect, the decorative first symbol C in the middle region 610C is temporarily stopped while displaying the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”), and the decoration first is displayed. Symbol C ±
1 symbol is hidden. The decorative reduced symbol in the variable display area 615 continues the variable display.

(Ha') in FIG. 65B is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect, the +1 symbol (“4”) of the decorative first symbol C is redisplayed in the middle rear region 612C above the middle region 610C. When the pseudo-ream exclusive symbol ("ream") is displayed on the decoration first symbol C, the symbol ("3") after the -1 symbol ("3") of the decoration first symbol C is +1 symbol ("ream"). "4")
It is displayed in the middle rear area 612C of the rear variation display area 612. Further, in the front variation display area 611, the -1 symbol (“3”) is displayed in the middle front region 611C, but the -1 symbol is not displayed in the left front region 611A and the right front region 611B.

(Hi') in FIG. 65B is a display device 4 when unit variation display is performed in a pseudo continuous effect.
It is a display screen of 1. By restarting the unit fluctuation display, the first decoration that was temporarily stopped and displayed
The symbols A to C have a normal variable display (“↓↓↓”). When the unit variation display is restarted in the pseudo continuous effect, the start memory is not digested. Therefore, the reserved digestion area 64
The special figure changing hold display 643 (special figure digestion hold display) displayed at 0 is in a state of being maintained as the display arranged on the pedestal.

FIG. 65B (Fu') is a display screen of the display device 41 when the temporary stop display is displayed again after the unit variation display is restarted by the pseudo continuous effect. The first decorative symbols A and B are the first decorative symbols A and B when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect (see (ha') in FIG. 65B).
Temporarily stopped again at B's +1 symbol ("6", "6"). Further, the decorative first symbol C is temporarily stopped again with the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”). After that, the third unit variation display is started by the pseudo continuous effect, and the main stop symbol is confirmed. Then, for example, when the main stop symbol is confirmed at "666", it becomes a big hit, and when it is confirmed at "626", it becomes a loss.

It should be noted that the temporary stop display may be performed again in the unit variation display after the third time. In this case, for example, each time the temporary stop display is performed, the display screen is repeatedly changed in the order of FIG. 65B (hi') and (fu'), and when the main stop symbol is confirmed, as after (fu'). The display screen is changed.

When the pseudo continuous effect occurs, the timing at which ± 1 symbol of the first decorative symbol is hidden is different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect does not occur (FIGS. 63, 64, 65A). Can be notified that Further, since the reach effect and the pseudo continuous effect are common from the viewpoint that two identical decorative first symbols A and B are aligned, ± 1 when the pseudo continuous effect occurs.
The timing at which the symbol is hidden may be the same as when the reach of FIG. 65A occurs.

[Screen transition example 2 when pseudo continuous effect occurs]
FIG. 65C is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is another example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect occurs.

(Nu'') in FIG. 65C is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous effect occurs from (ni) in FIG. 65A, and varies in the left area 610A of the variation display area 610. This is a display screen when the displayed decorative first symbol A (“3”) is temporarily stopped.

In (Nu'') of FIG. 65C, when the decoration first symbol A stops in the left region 610A, the decoration first
Along with the -1 symbol ("2") of the symbol A, the +1 symbol ("4") is also hidden. This is because the +1 symbol of the first decorative symbol A does not become the main stop symbol (“8”) and is not necessary ((fu'in FIG. 65C).
')reference).

FIG. 65C (ne'') is a display device when the decorative first symbol B (“3”) that is variablely displayed in the right area 610B of the variable display area 610 when the pseudo continuous effect occurs is temporarily stopped. 4
It is a display screen of 1. The first decorative symbol A (“3”) and the first decorative symbol B (“3”) are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped. When the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right region 610B, the ± 1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is also hidden in the same manner as the decorative first symbol A in the left region 610A. The +1 symbol ("4") of the decoration 1st symbol B is hidden because the +1 symbol is the main stop symbol ("8").
This is because it is different from (see (F'') in FIG. 65C). In addition, the pseudo-ream exclusive symbol ("ream") is variablely displayed on the decorative first symbol C of the middle region 610C, and "6" is displayed on the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C.
Is displayed in a variable manner.

('') In FIG. 65C is a display device 41 when the first unit variation display is completed by the pseudo continuous effect and the decorative first symbols A to C are pseudo-stop display (temporary stop display). It is a display screen. It is the same as (') in FIG. 65C except that "3" and "3" are displayed in the first decorative symbols A and B, and the +1 symbol of the first decorative symbols A and B is hidden. ..

(Ha'') in FIG. 65C is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect, the +1 symbol (“7”) of the decorative first symbol C is displayed in the middle rear region 612C above the middle region 610C, and below the middle region 610C. Decorated in the middle front area 611C -1 symbol of the first symbol C ("6"
") Is redisplayed. The ± 1 symbols of the first decorative symbols A and B are maintained in a hidden state.

FIG. 65C (Hi'') is a display screen of the display device 41 when the unit variation display is performed by the pseudo continuous effect. When the unit fluctuation display is restarted, the decorative first symbols A to C, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed in the same manner as (hi') in FIG. 65B, become the normal fluctuation display (“↓↓↓”). It should be noted that the first decorative symbols A and B, which are hidden from (nu'') to ('') in FIG. 65C.
± 1 symbols (“2” and “4”) may be excluded from the variation display symbol arrangement in the left region 610A and the right region 610B. That is, in (Hi'') of FIG. 65C, the player can visually recognize how the identification information is changed in the symbol arrangement in which "2" and "4" are omitted on the left and right sides of the display screen. It can be recognized that "" and "4" are not the main stop symbols ("8").

FIG. 65C (F'') is a display screen of the display device 41 when the temporary stop display is displayed again after the unit variation display is restarted by the pseudo continuous effect. The first decorative symbols A and B are +1 of the first decorative symbols A and B that were hidden when temporarily stopped in the first unit variation display in the pseudo continuous effect.
It is temporarily stopped again with a symbol ("8", "8") different from the symbol ("4", "4"). The different symbol is a symbol that becomes the main stop symbol.

Further, the decorative first symbol C is temporarily stopped again with the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”). afterwards,
The third unit variation display is started by the pseudo continuous effect, and the main stop symbol is confirmed. Then, for example, when the main stop symbol is confirmed at "888", it becomes a big hit, and when it is confirmed at "838", it becomes a miss. In the unit variation display from the third time onward, the temporary stop display is performed again by changing the display screen in the order of FIGS. 65C (hi'') and (fu'') each time the temporary stop display is performed. May be.

Further, each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed, ± 1 symbol of the symbol that is temporarily stopped may be hidden and removed from the variable display symbol arrangement. By doing so, as the number of times of the pseudo-continuous production increases, the symbol that is actually stopped or the symbol that becomes the reach is narrowed down, so that even if the symbol of interest is displayed in a variable manner at high speed, it becomes easy to understand and the interest is improved. Further, when the symbol to be narrowed down is a probabilistic symbol, it becomes easier to attract the attention of the player, so that the interest can be further improved.

[Screen transition example 3 when pseudo continuous effect occurs]
FIG. 65D is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is another second example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect occurs. ..

(Nu''') in FIG. 65D is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous effect occurs from (ni) in FIG. 65A, and is in the left area 610A of the variation display area 610. This is a display screen when the first symbol A (“3”), which is displayed in a variable manner, is temporarily stopped. Along with the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A, ± 1 symbols (“2”, “4”) of the decorative first symbol A are hidden (may be in a state where it is difficult to see).

(Ne''') in FIG. 65D is displayed in a variable manner in the right region 610B and the middle region 610C of the variable display area 610 when the pseudo continuous effect occurs, and the decorative first symbols B and C (“4”, “4”, "
4 ”) is a display screen of the display device 41 when temporarily stopped. The same symbol ("4", "4") is displayed on the decorative first symbols B and C, and the symbol is, for example, the temporarily stopped decorative first symbol A.
It is a design one after ("3").

As shown in (ne''') of FIG. 65D, the first decorative symbols B and C are temporarily stopped at the positions where the rows are shifted so as not to be in a horizontal row with the temporarily stopped decorative first symbol A. NS. therefore,
Since the decoration first symbols A to C are different from the normal stop mode in which they are lined up in a horizontal row in an effective line relationship, the player can feel a sense of discomfort and have a sense of expectation that a pseudo continuous effect will occur. ..

The first decorative symbols B and C, which are temporarily stopped at positions deviated from the first decorative symbol A, are the first decorative symbols.
It may be the same symbol (“3”) or -1 symbol (“2”) as symbol A. In this case, "3" of the first decorative symbols A to C are displayed on the display screen, but "3" is displayed at a position where the lines are shifted.
Is displayed, the player can determine that the decorative first symbols A to C are not lined up in a horizontal row in an effective line relationship, and can recognize that it is not a big hit.

In FIG. 65D ('''), the first unit variation display is completed by the pseudo continuous effect, and the first decoration is displayed.
This is a display screen of the display device 41 when the symbols A to C are pseudo-stop display (temporary stop display). Except for the fact that "3" is displayed on the first decorative symbol A, "4" and "4" are displayed on the first decorative symbols B and C, and the +1 symbol of the first decorative symbols B and C is hidden. Is (ne'''in Fig. 65D
).

FIG. 65D (is "") is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit fluctuation display is started in the pseudo continuous production,
The +1 symbols (“5” and “5”) of the first symbols B and C are displayed in the right rear region 612B and the middle rear region 612C of the rear variation display area 612, respectively. The ± 1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is maintained in a hidden state. After that, as shown in (H'') of FIG. 65C, the unit variation display of the pseudo continuous effect is continued.

[Example of screen transition of the entire game when other effect display occurs]
FIG. 66A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the second embodiment, and is an example of screen transitions of the entire game when various effect displays occur.

FIG. 66A (f) is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display. Of FIG. 66A
As shown in (f), a button operation promotion display ("" Operation promotion image) 670, warning display (warning image) 679,
Is displayed. The button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) 670 is a display that prompts the player to operate the effect button 25. The warning display (warning image) 679 is a display for giving some warning to the player, and here is a display for being careful not to come into contact with a movable member provided in a frame such as a glass frame 15. The button operation promotion display 670 and the warning display 679 are in the middle region 61.
It is arranged in front (upper layer) of the special decorative symbol of 0C, the reserved display unit 630, and the reserved digestion area 640, and is displayed with priority.

In the upper right corner of the display screen, a launch position instruction display (launch position instruction character, right-handed instruction notification) 691 for instructing right-handed striking is displayed. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a remaining time display (remaining time character) 673 that displays the remaining time in the effect mode state in which a special effect can be generated is displayed. The effect mode state is, for example, a mission mode that presents achievement conditions such as "reach within 5 minutes!", A mode that expects a latent probability change, and a look-ahead effect mode that is based on a preliminary determination for hold. Also, in the lower right corner of the display screen, BGM display 674 that displays the selected BGM.
Is displayed.

At the left end of the display screen, a specific game state display consisting of an image such as "RUSH" indicating that a specific game state has occurred at a position overlapping the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 (
Specific game state image) 675 is displayed. The specific game state display 675 is arranged on the back surface (lower layer) of the left area 610A and is displayed without priority.

FIG. 66A (e) is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol A (“2”), which is variablely displayed in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610, temporarily stops. As shown in FIG. 63 (), immediately before the decoration first symbol A in the left area 610A temporarily stops, the display of the -1 symbol (“1”) of the decoration first symbol A in the left front area 611A is partially displayed. It disappears, and the image (“RUSH”) of the specific game status display 675 displayed on the back of the -1 symbol becomes recognizable. The -1 symbol (“1”) of the decorative first symbol A displayed in the left front area 611A is the decorative first symbol A.
("2") is all hidden just before the temporary stop. In addition, the +1 symbol of the first decorative symbol A is
It is not displayed in the left rear area 612A of the rear variation display area 612.

The (ma) of FIG. 66A is decorated with the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 and the first symbol A (“2””.
) Is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol B (“5”) is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B after the temporary stop. Similar to the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A in the left area 610A, just before the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol B in the right area 610B, the -1 symbol (“4”) of the decorative first symbol B in the right front area 611B. Partially disappears, and the BGM display 674 displayed at a position overlapping the -1 symbol becomes easier to recognize. The -1 symbol (“4”) of the decorative first symbol B displayed in the right front area 611B is all hidden immediately before the decorative first symbol B (“5”) is temporarily stopped. Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed in the right rear area 612B of the rear variation display area 612.

FIG. 66A shows the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol C is temporarily stopped in the middle region 610C after the decorative first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right region 610B of the variable display area 610. be. Similar to the temporary stop of the decoration 1st symbol A of the left area 610A and the decoration 1st symbol B of the right area 610B, just before the decoration 1st symbols A to C and the decoration reduction symbols stop, the middle front area 611
Decoration of C The display of the -1 symbol (“3”) of the first symbol C is partially erased, and the button operation promotion display 670 and the warning display 679 displayed at positions overlapping the -1 symbol are easily recognized. Left area 610
In A, "2" of the first decorative symbol A is in the temporary stop state, and in the right area 610B, "5" of the first decorative symbol B is in the temporary stop state.

FIG. 66A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 and the decorative reduced symbols in the display area 615 are finally stopped. The -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C displayed in the middle front area 611C is hidden immediately before all the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbols are stopped. Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is not displayed in the middle rear region 612C of the rear variation display area 612.

FIG. 66A (me) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main stop of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative reduced symbol. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, the decoration 1st symbol A to the variable display area 610
C is temporarily displayed in reverse fluctuation so as to go back to the upper side of the display screen (minus fluctuation), and a part of each -1 symbol is displayed in the front fluctuation display area 611. After that, the decorative first symbols A to C become a normal variable display. The decorative reduced symbol in the variable display area 615 is displayed in a variable manner as usual in a variable mode that changes in order on the spot without scrolling.

The decoration first symbols A to C of the above second embodiment are composed of a frame and a number part, but in addition to the frame and the number part, a character part and a decoration part of the frame are added to form one design. It may be configured. In this case, the character portion and the decorative portion of the frame may be hidden instead of hiding the design itself or making it difficult to see. Further, after the design is reduced, the character portion, the decorative portion of the frame, and the frame may be hidden so that only the number portion can be seen. In addition, since the time saving state (normal power support state, power support state) becomes a shortening fluctuation (ultra-shortening fluctuation), the character part and the decorative part of the frame may not be displayed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the temporarily stopped decorative first symbol A (left large symbol) and decorative second symbol B (right large symbol) are tentatively connected to the decorative first symbol C (medium and large symbol). Since it is not necessary to pay attention until the stop symbol is displayed, the decorative first symbol C may be moved to or reduced to the outer edge of the display screen of the display device 41 so as to be easy to see.

Further, in the second embodiment, by maximizing the temporary stop and the main stop of the first decorative symbols A to C until the ± 1 symbols of the first decorative symbols A to C disappear or there is no room for display. , ± 1 One or both of the symbols may be hidden.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C that are temporarily stopped or the main stop may be hidden or difficult to see, triggered by the hold change notice (pre-reading notice effect). According to such an aspect, it is possible to suppress the overlap between the symbol and the hold display 633, so that the effect of the hold change notice can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the second embodiment, if the total number of holdings is 0 after the first decorative symbols A to C are stopped, the next special figure variation display game is not started. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 63. As shown in (the), the non-display state of ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C is continued.
However, in order for the player to easily understand that the game is not executed or that the game can be played, a predetermined time elapse or a predetermined operation is executed even when the special figure variation display game is not executed. As a result, ± 1 symbols of the first ornamental symbols A to C can be changed to, for example, (of FIG. 63).
It may be redisplayed as shown in).

The predetermined time is, for example, when the effect control device 300 receives the customer waiting demo command and the customer waiting demo is executed, or when a certain time has passed since the special figure variation display game ends.
It is determined that the lapse has passed, and ± 1 symbols of the first decorative symbols A to C are redisplayed. Further, the predetermined operation is, for example, a button operation for displaying a screen for confirming the game history or a screen for adjusting the volume or brightness when the special figure variation display game is not executed (operation of the effect button 25). When is performed, it is determined that the execution has been performed, and ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C are redisplayed.
When the screen for checking the displayed game history or the screen for adjusting the volume or brightness is turned off, it is determined that the predetermined operation has been executed, and the decoration 1st symbols A to C ± 1 The symbol may be redisplayed.

According to such an aspect, when the special figure variation display is not executed, the player can easily understand that the game is not executed and that the game can be played.

[Modification example]
The following configuration may be adopted as a modification of the above second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the variable display area 610 so as to be arranged in one line in the horizontal direction, but as shown in FIG. 66B, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed horizontally. It may be displayed so as to be lined up in three lines in the direction. That is, in the second embodiment, only one horizontal line of the decorative first symbols A to C is completely displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, but in the modified example, the horizontal 3 is displayed. It is a line.

FIG. 66B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order when the decorative first symbol is displayed in a plurality of lines in the modified example of the second embodiment. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the second embodiment.

As shown in (or) of FIG. 66B, the variable display area 610 according to the modified example of the second embodiment is
Divided into 3x3 regions (upper left region 610A1, middle left region 610A2, lower left region 610A3, upper right region 610B1, middle right region 610B2, lower right region 610B3, middle upper region 610C1, middle middle region 610C2, middle lower region 610C3) The first design A is decorated in each area.
~ C is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modified example of the second embodiment is the variable display area 6.
The upper left area (610A1, upper right area 610B1, middle upper area 610C1) of 10 is one symbol after the first symbols A to C. Similarly, the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modified example of the second embodiment is the lower region of the variable display area 610 (lower left region 610A3,
The lower right area 610B3 and the lower middle area 610C3) are the symbols one before the first symbols A to C.

In the second embodiment, the mode in which the first decorative symbols A to C and the reduced decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is displayed as "↓↓↓", but as shown in (or) in FIG. 66B, the second embodiment is displayed. In the modified example of the form, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display are displayed in 3 × 3 so that the variable display area 610 is an area of 3 rows and 3 columns (3 × 3). There is.

FIG. 66B (Yu) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first decorative symbols A to C and the reduced decorative symbols are finally stopped. The ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modified example of the second embodiment are hidden as in the second embodiment. The ± 1 symbols of the first symbols A to C may be in a mode that is difficult to see.

Further, in the special figure variation display game according to the modified example of the second embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect can be performed as in the second embodiment. Specifically, as in FIGS. 65B and 65C of the second embodiment, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed using a pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (“ream”), and as in FIG. 65D of the second embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed. Pseudo-continuous production may be performed by temporarily stopping the three rows of decoration first symbols B and C at positions where the rows are offset from each other so as not to form a horizontal row with the three rows of decoration first symbols A. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect according to the modified example, the decorative first symbol A is also performed as in the second embodiment.
+1 symbol of ~ C (design of the upper area of the variable display area 610, one symbol after the first symbols A to C) and -1 symbol of the first decorative symbols A to C (lower of the variable display area 610) The area decoration (the symbol one before the first symbols A to C) may be hidden or difficult to see, and the hidden ± 1 symbol may be excluded from the variable display symbol arrangement.

The gaming machine 10 according to such a modified example of the second embodiment can also obtain the same action and effect as the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is a variable display in which a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) and decorative reduced symbols) are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns based on the establishment of the starting condition. A display means (display device 41) capable of displaying a game (special figure variation display game) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variation display game are provided.
The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the stop control for setting the predetermined identification information in the variation display into the stop state (main stop state), and before executing the stop control, the predetermined identification information in the variation display is displayed. The identification information (-1 symbol or +1 symbol) displayed in the same row as the identification information and displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information is more difficult to see than the predetermined identification information (for example). Show or hide with high transparency).

According to such a game machine 10, it becomes easy to see a mode in which the hold display 633 of the hold display unit 630 and the hold display during the special figure change of the hold digestion area 640 are held and shifted at the time of the main stop, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to. Further, in particular, even when the effect display or the like is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A, the effect display can be conspicuous and attract the player's attention at the time of the main stop, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be made to.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute temporary stop control for setting a predetermined identification information in the variation display to a temporary stop state different from the stop state, and the effect changes before the temporary stop control is executed. Fluctuations with respect to the predetermined identification information being displayed The identification information (-1 symbol or +1 symbol) displayed before or after the display direction is displayed or hidden in a state in which it is harder to see than the predetermined identification information. .. Therefore, at the time of temporary stop, the hold display of the hold display unit 630 and the hold digestion area 6
At 40, it becomes easier to see the hold display during the change of the special figure during digestion, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in particular, even when the effect display or the like is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A.
At the time of the temporary stop as well as the main stop, the effect display can be conspicuous and the player's attention can be attracted, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) matches the identification information in the temporary stop state by the temporary stop control and the identification information in the stop state by the stop control, and stops before executing the temporary stop control. The identification information (-1 symbol or +1 symbol) displayed before or after the variation display direction with respect to the identification information in the state is displayed in a state that is harder to see than the identification information in the stopped state.
Or hide it. Therefore, at the time of temporary stop, it is possible to prevent other displays from becoming difficult to see due to the identification information displayed before or after the temporary stop identification information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to such an aspect, at the time of temporary stop, the player
The temporarily suspended identification information is easier to recognize than the identification information displayed before or after the identification information. Then, when the identification information in the temporarily stopped state and the identification information in the stopped state match, the player can determine that the identification information recognized at the time of the temporary stop is the identification information to be stopped as it is. This makes it easier to understand the progress of the game, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, by making ± 1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C hidden or difficult to see, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the symbols to be stopped or temporarily stopped. Further, when the ± 1 symbol is hidden or difficult to see, the player can easily pay attention to the content of the warning display 679, so that the content of the warning display 679 can be easily recognized and the warning can be smoothly responded to. become. Further, in the gaming machine 10, ± 1 symbols of the first decorative symbols A to C can be prevented from overlapping with a specific screen display (directive display image) such as the hold display 633, so that the decorativeness is ensured and effective. It is possible to perform a typical production and improve the interest.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

[Single-shot command processing of the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) of the third embodiment in the reception command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 67 shows the effect control device 300.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot command processing executed by. B1
The processes from 301 to B1322 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 35).
reference).

The effect control device 300 of the third embodiment sets the game status flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1322), executes the stopped effect setting process (B1323), and performs the single-shot command process. finish.

[Stopping effect setting process]
With reference to FIG. 68, the details of the stopped effect setting process (B1323) in the single-shot command process of the third embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the stopped effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first sets the non-display timing of the large symbol (identification information, decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C)) during stop display (B2501), and then sets the non-display timing (B2501), and then the small symbol during stop display. The non-display timing of the symbol (identification information, decorative reduced symbol (decorative second symbol)) is set (B2502).

Next, the effect control device 300 displays the hold display being displayed (hold display 633 of the hold display unit 630).
, Set the non-display timing of the hold display 643) during the special figure change of the hold digestion area 640 (
B2503). Here, the non-display timing of the hold number display may also be set.

Then, in the effect control device 300, the display result of the special figure variation display game is a special result (big hit).
It is determined whether or not (B2504).

When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300 sets the appearance timing (display timing) at which the fanfare background (background used during the fanfare) appears (B2505), and then sets the appearance timing (display timing). After setting the display mode and the appearance mode of the fanfare background (B2506), the stopped effect setting process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the effect control device 300 ends the stopped effect setting process as it is.

[Timing chart of display when a big hit occurs]
Next, a change in the display mode of the display screen when a big hit occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a timing chart illustrating a change in the display mode with the passage of time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device 41 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 69, during the special figure variation display game, the first decorative symbol A to C (large symbol, special decorative symbol), the second decorative symbol (small symbol, reduced decorative symbol), and the number of holdings are displayed (special symbol). 1 Hold number display unit 6
50 or special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display), standby hold display (hold display 633), and special figure changing hold display 643 (special figure digestion hold display) are displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. There is. On the other hand, the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 681 are not displayed on the display screen and are hidden.

The time T1 is a time when the symbol stop command is received by the effect control device 300 (B1319) and the special figure variation display game being executed is variable-stopped. When the special figure change display game stops changing at time T1, the special figure change pending display 643 is hidden. At that time, for example, the pedestal indicating the reserved digestion region 640 may remain displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit, the display mode of the display screen changes as follows. In this case, it is desirable that the pedestal indicating the reserved digestion area 640 is hidden at the timing when the decorative first symbols A to C, which will be described later, are hidden or at the timing when the jackpot display is started.

The period from the time T1 to the time T2 is the game result confirmation period A in which the result of the special figure variation display game can be confirmed. In the game result confirmation period A, the display of the stopped symbols (identification information) is maintained on the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbols so that the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game. ing. Further, in the game result confirmation period A, a suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence of a special gaming state is executed, and the fanfare background 680 begins to be displayed.

The time T2 is the time when the special game transition period B for shifting to the special game state is started. When the special game transition period B is started at time T2, the decoration first symbols A to C and the standby hold display are hidden. The period consisting of the game result confirmation period A and the special game transition period B is the display time set in step A4703 (waiting time for change in decorative special figure, stop display time).
Or, it corresponds to the display time (waiting time for change of decorative special figure, stop display time) set in step B1321. The display time set in step A4703 and the display time set in step B1321 are basically the same.

At time T3, a fanfare command is received by the effect control device 300 (B2101).
, This is the time when the fanfare display period C for displaying the fanfare is started.
The fanfare display period C is a time corresponding to the fanfare time set in the special figure display processing (FIG. 23) (A4821). At time T3, when the fanfare display period C is started, the jackpot display for notifying the jackpot is also started. When the jackpot display is started, the "big hit" character 681 that notifies the jackpot is displayed as the jackpot display. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the number of pending items are hidden.

The time T4 is the time when the fanfare display period C ends and the big hit round in the special game state (big hit state) starts. At time T4, the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 681 are hidden.

In the present embodiment, the start of the jackpot display may be regarded as the start of the special gaming state, or the start of the jackpot round may be regarded as the start of the special gaming state.

[Example of screen transition when a big hit]
FIG. 70 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 when a big hit occurs in the third embodiment in chronological order.

FIG. 70 (et al.) Is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game before the big hit. In FIG. 70 (et al.), With the execution of the special figure variation display game, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the variable display area 610, and the decorative second symbols (small symbols, decorative reduced symbols) are displayed in the variable display area 615. It is displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 70A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately after the start of the game result confirmation period A after the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols to be variablely displayed are stopped. In the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, the stop display of "777" indicating that the result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit is stopped and displayed as the decorative first symbols A to C or the decorative second symbol. ing. Therefore, the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game during the game result confirmation period A.

FIG. 70A is a display screen of the display device 41 when a suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence of a special game state (big hit state) is executed during the game result confirmation period A and the fanfare background 680 starts to be displayed. .. The fanfare background 680 functions as a first notification image that indirectly suggests that a special gaming state has occurred, that is, implicitly notifies the occurrence of the special gaming state, unlike the “big hit” character 681 and the like. The first broadcast image is a mode in which the player is expected to be a big hit (for example, a lively mode), but does not include information that directly indicates that the jackpot will be a big hit, such as the "big hit" character 681. The fanfare background 680 is displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. therefore,
The fanfare background 680 does not hide the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbol.

In FIG. 70, the fanfare background 680 is displayed in a slide-in manner in the display screen (slide-in display), but may be displayed in other production modes. For example, the fanfare background 680 may be displayed in its entirety on the display screen (
Pop-up display), may be displayed in a form in which a part of the display screen is cut off (cut-in display).

The second decorative symbol of the variable display area 615 may be displayed at the left end of the display screen so as not to overlap with the fanfare background 680 that is slide-in displayed from the right end of the display screen. By setting the display position in this way, it is possible to display the decorative second symbol of the variable display area 615 and the fanfare background 680 so that the player can easily see them. Further, when the decorative second symbol of the variable display area 615 is displayed on the right end of the display screen as in the above embodiment, the fanfare background 680 may be displayed by sliding in from the left end of the display screen. Even in such an aspect, it is possible to prevent the second decorative symbol of the variable display area 615 from overlapping the fanfare background 680.

Further, by displaying the fanfare background 680 in the manner shown in FIG. 70 (R), it is possible to avoid overlapping with the standby hold display (hold display 633) and the special figure changing hold display 643. In addition, the fanfare background 680 is displayed on the back side (lower layer) of the fanfare background 680 in a manner that makes it easier to visually recognize the waiting hold display and the special figure changing hold display 643 (for example, a square frame filled with a single color). ) May be displayed and superimposed, so that the standby hold display and the special figure changing hold display 643 may be conspicuous.

FIG. 70 (re) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game transition period B is started. When the special transition period B is started, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are hidden. Further, the entire fanfare background 680 is displayed on the display screen, and by hiding the decorative first symbols A to C, the player can easily see the fanfare background 680. In addition, the standby hold display (hold display 633) is hidden.

FIG. 70 (ro) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C is started. When the fanfare display period C is started, as shown in FIG. 70 (ro), the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680 has a "big hit" character that directly notifies the player that a big hit will occur. 681 is displayed. Unlike the fanfare background 680, the "big hit" character 681 directly notifies that a special gaming state has occurred, that is, functions as a second notification image that explicitly notifies the occurrence of a special gaming state. In addition, the variable display area 6
15 decorative second symbols, special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 hold number display, special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 hold number display, hold display unit 630 wait hold display (hold display 633) , The reserved digestion area 640, and are hidden. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to gaze at the "big hit" character 681 highlighted on the display screen. Further, if the display of the decorative second symbol remains at the timing when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, the player may misunderstand the game state, but the decorative second symbol is hidden. The player does not misidentify the playing state.

FIG. 70 (wa) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C ends and the big hit round in the special game state (big hit state) is started. When the jackpot round starts, the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 681 are hidden. In addition, on the display screen, a launch position instruction display 691 for instructing a right-handed hit, a round display 676 indicating the current round (“1R”), and a stop symbol of the special figure variation display game at the time of a big hit (
The jackpot stop symbol display 677 indicating “7”) and the game points 678 corresponding to the number of game balls (game value) acquired (given) at the time of the jackpot are displayed.

[Modification example of display timing chart when a big hit occurs]
Next, a modified example of the display mode of the display screen when a big hit is made will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a timing chart for explaining a change in the display mode with the passage of time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device 41 of the modified example of the third embodiment. note that,
In the following description of FIG. 71, the description overlapping with FIG. 69 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the timing chart of the modified example of the third embodiment, the time T2'is adopted instead of the time T2 at which the special game transition period B is started. The time T2'is the time when the special game type confirmation period B'for confirming the type of the special game state is started. The period consisting of the game result confirmation period A and the special game type confirmation period B'is step A4.
The display time set in 703 (waiting time for change of decorative special figure, stop display time) and step B
It corresponds to the display time (waiting time for change of decorative special figure, stop display time) set in 1321.

When the special game type confirmation period B'begins at time T2', the number of pending displays is hidden along with the first decorative symbols A to C and the waiting hold display, and the fanfare background 680 is displayed.
Therefore, only the second decorative symbol and the fanfare background 680 are displayed on the display screen, and the player can easily pay attention to the fanfare background 680 together with the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol.

[Transformation example of screen transition when a big hit occurs]
FIG. 72 shows a screen transition showing the display screen of the display device 41 in which the fanfare background 680 and the “big hit” character 681 are displayed in different display modes depending on the type of big hit in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a figure. In the following description of FIG. 72, the description overlapping with FIG. 70 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 72 (R) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game type confirmation period B'is started and a super-big hit effect (super-big hit display) is generated from (R) in FIG. 70. During the special game type confirmation period B'when the super jackpot effect occurs, as shown in (Ru') of FIG. 72, the fanfare background 68 suggesting the occurrence of the super jackpot effect and the super jackpot (probability variation jackpot)
0A is displayed as a slide-in.

The super jackpot effect is, for example, when the number of jackpot rounds is large (for example, in the case of 16R) or when the transition to a state (probability variation state, probability fluctuation state) in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, jackpot) is high after the end of the special gaming state. It is a production displayed in. Therefore, when the decorative first symbols A to C and the stopped symbols of the decorative second symbol are probabilistic jackpot symbols (for example, "777") suggesting a transition to the probabilistic state after the end of the special gaming state, a super jackpot effect is produced. Can be generated. Further, even when the decorative first symbols A to C and the stopped symbols of the decorative second symbol are normal jackpot symbols (for example, "666") that do not suggest a transition to the probabilistic state after the end of the special gaming state.
When the number of big hit rounds is large (for example, in the case of 16R) or when the promotion effect to the probabilistic big hit occurs during the special game state, the super big hit effect can be generated.

FIG. 72 (re') is a display screen of the display device 41 after the fanfare background 680A is slide-in-displayed during the special game type confirmation period B'when the super jackpot effect occurs. The fanfare background 680A, which suggests the occurrence of a super jackpot effect, is displayed, for example, so that one side of the fanfare background 680A has a wavy shape that draws a sine curve.

FIG. 72 (ro') is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C starts and a super jackpot effect occurs. When the fanfare display period C starts and a super jackpot effect occurs, the "super jackpot" character 681A is displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680A as shown in (ro') of FIG. 72, and the variable display is performed. Area 615 decoration second
The symbol ("777") is hidden. Therefore, the player is highlighted on the display screen "
It becomes easier to pay attention to the "super jackpot" character 681A. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (wa), the jackpot round in the special gaming state is started.

FIG. 72 (Ru'') is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game type confirmation period B'is started and a big hit effect (big hit display) is generated from (Ri) of FIG. 70. During the special game type confirmation period B'when the jackpot effect occurs, as shown in (Ru'') of FIG. 72, the fanfare background 680B suggesting the occurrence of the jackpot effect and the jackpot (normal jackpot) is displayed as a slide-in display. Will be done.

The jackpot effect is, for example, when the number of jackpot rounds is small (for example, in the case of 5R) or in the normal gaming state (normal state) in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, jackpot) is low after the end of the special gaming state.
This is the effect that is displayed when shifting to. Therefore, when the decorative first symbols A to C and the stopped symbols of the decorative second symbol are normal jackpot symbols (for example, "666") that do not suggest a transition to the probabilistic state after the end of the special gaming state, the special gaming state. It is possible to generate a jackpot effect that does not suggest a transition to a probabilistic state after the end of. Further, even when the number of big hit rounds is small (for example, in the case of 5R), the big hit effect can be generated.

FIG. 72 (re'') is a display screen of the display device 41 after the fanfare background 680B is slide-in-displayed during the special game type confirmation period B'when the jackpot effect occurs. The fanfare background 680B, which suggests the occurrence of a jackpot effect, is displayed as if one corner of the fanfare background 680B is cut off diagonally, for example. The fanfare background 680B may be displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from the fanfare background 680A, which suggests the occurrence of a super jackpot effect, and can be displayed in a shape, pattern, or color different from that of the fanfare background 680A, or a combination thereof. ..

FIG. 72 (ro'') is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C starts and a big hit effect is generated. When the fanfare display period C starts and a big hit effect occurs, the "big hit" character 681B is displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680B as shown in (ro'') of FIG. 72, and the variable display area. The second decorative symbol (“666”) of 615 is hidden. Therefore, the player can easily pay attention to the "big hit" character 681B highlighted on the display screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (wa), the jackpot round in the special gaming state is started.

As described above, the fanfare background 680 (680A, 680B) of the modified example of the third embodiment
) And the "big hit" character 681 (681A, 681B) are the types (types) of the big hits that occur.
The display mode differs depending on the situation. For example, the type of jackpot is a probability variable jackpot / normal jackpot or a type related to the number of rounds. Therefore, the type (type) of the jackpot generated from the type of the fanfare background 680 during the special game type confirmation period B'is suggested, and the type (type) of the jackpot generated from the type of the "big hit" character 681 during the fanfare display period C. ), It is possible to notify the player of the type of jackpot even before the special gaming state (big hit state) is started. Therefore, the player can identify the type of jackpot from the fanfare background 680 and the type of the "big hit" character 681 together with the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol. In addition, the player has a fanfare background of 680 before the special gaming state is started.
Since the type of the jackpot can be identified from the type of the "big hit" character 681, what kind of effect is expected to occur for the effect during the big hit (the big hit promotion effect or the mode transition effect that shifts after the big hit ends). Or it can be prepared in advance.

In the above-mentioned third embodiment, in addition to the above-described aspects, the first decorative symbol A to C, the second decorative symbol, the number of hold display, the hold hold display (hold display 633), or the hold display during special figure change 6
The timing of hiding such as 43 may be changed as appropriate.

For example, when a hold change effect is performed by a look-ahead notice (hold change notice, etc.) and a big hit occurs, the timing at which the hold hold display (hold display 633) and the special figure changing hold display 643 are hidden (FIG. 69). (See T1 and T2) may be delayed so that the display is hidden at the same timing as the display of the second decorative symbol and the number of holds (see T3 in FIG. 69).

In this way, by decorating the waiting hold display and hiding it at the same timing as the second symbol and the holding number display, it is possible to provide a time for grasping the position of the digestion order of the changed wait hold display and the time when it is digested. can. Therefore, even if the changed standby hold display is returned to the normal display mode after the end of the big hit, the player can grasp the standby hold display and has a feeling of expectation for the game corresponding to the wait hold display. Can have

In addition, by decorating the hold display 643 during the change of the special figure changed by the hold change effect and hiding it at the same timing as the second symbol and the number of holds display, it is time to grasp what kind of hold display mode is the big hit. Can be provided. Therefore, the next time the same hold display mode is adopted, the player can have a good impression of the hold display mode and have a sense of expectation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the above third embodiment, the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 6
When the jackpot occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times or more, the 81 may be displayed in a special display mode having a shape, pattern, color, or the like different from the normal display mode. For example, as a special display mode, the shape and pattern of the fanfare background 680 may be changed and displayed. Further, as a special display mode, the color and font of the "big hit" character 681 may be changed (for example, displayed in large gold), or characters such as "congratulations" may be additionally displayed together with the "big hit" character 681. ..

In addition, in the above third embodiment, the sound output mode of the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) is displayed when the fanfare background 680 is displayed and when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed. Volume, frequency, etc.) may be changed.

For example, "big hit" rather than speaker volume when fanfare background 680 is displayed
By increasing the speaker volume when the character 681 is displayed, it is possible to clearly notify that the jackpot state is in effect. Further, since the speaker volume when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed is high, for example, when the type of big hit and the number of rounds are notified by the voice of the speaker after the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, The player can easily hear the notification.

By making the speaker volume when the fanfare background 680 is displayed larger than the speaker volume when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, the effect before the notification of the big hit state is emphasized. May be good.

Further, the change in the sound output mode of the speaker is not limited to the volume, and the frequency (pitch) of a predetermined sound notified from the gaming machine 10 may be changed. Fanfare background 680
By making the frequency of the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed higher than the frequency of the sound notified when is displayed, the player can display the "big hit" character 681 and the number of rounds. It is possible to appeal that the suggestion of

By making the frequency of the sound notified when the fanfare background 680 is displayed larger than the frequency of the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, it is notified that the jackpot state is in effect. You may emphasize the production before it is done.

Further, the frequency of the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed may be set to a predetermined frequency or less. In this way, by making the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed a bass (heavy bass), the woofer is provided at a position different from that of the normally used speaker of the game machine 10. Since the sound quality of the sound notified from (the speaker in charge of bass reproduction) is changed and heard, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be aware of the notified sound. Further, by lowering the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, the speaker, the air around it, the game machine 10, etc. can be vibrated. Therefore, the player can vibrate by these vibrations. It is possible to appeal that the display of the "big hit" character 681 and the suggestion of the number of rounds will start.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment has identification information (decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C, large symbols), decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C, small) based on the establishment of the starting condition. Display means (display device 4) capable of displaying a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays variable display of)).
1) and the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect related to the variable display game.
) And. The gaming machine 10 can generate a special gaming state (big hit state) that gives a game value to the player when the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result (big hit). The display means (display device 41) displays the first identification information (decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C, large symbols)) as identification information in a size different from that of the first identification information. The second identification information (decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C, small symbols)) can be displayed. The effect control means (effect control device 300) stops and displays the first identification information and the second identification information to be variablely displayed, and suggests the occurrence of a special gaming state when the display result of the variable display game is a special result. The suggestion effect is executed, and while the suggestion effect is being executed, the stop-displayed first identification information is hidden, while the stop-displayed second identification information is maintained.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can be prepared for the occurrence of the special gaming state by the suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence of the special gaming state. For example, the player can pull out the ball of the lower plate 23 or replace the box (so-called dollar box) in which the acquired game ball is put with an empty one when the suggestion effect occurs. Further, even after the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the identification information is continuously displayed for a while, so that the player can confirm the result of the special figure variable display game.

Second identification information (decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C, small symbols) even during suggestion production
) Is maintained, the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game from the stop symbol of the second identification information, and can improve the interest of the game. Further, since the decorative first symbols A to C on the display screen are hidden during the execution of the suggestion effect, the player can easily see the image (fanfare background 680) suggesting the occurrence of the special gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a first broadcast image (fanfare background 680) that implicitly notifies the occurrence of a special gaming state (big hit state) and the first broadcast image as a suggestion effect. A second notification image (“big hit” character 681) that explicitly notifies the occurrence of the special gaming state after the start is displayed on the display means (display device 41). Therefore, the player can confirm that the special gaming state has occurred in the second notification image after raising the expectation for the occurrence of the special gaming state in the first notification image, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the suggestion effect can be executed in two stages of the display of the first notification image and the display of the second notification image, the time of the suggestion effect can be lengthened to prepare the player for the occurrence of the special gaming state. ..

The effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the second broadcast image (“big hit” character 681).
The display means (display device 41) is displayed in such a manner that the type of the special gaming state (big hit state) can be identified (“super big hit” character 681A, “big hit” character 681B). Therefore, the player
Before the special game state is started, the type of jackpot can be identified from the type of the second notification image, so what kind of effect is expected to occur for the effect during the big hit is prepared in advance. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 80. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments.

[Production control device of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an effect control device 300 constituting the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a substrate connected to the effect control device 300, and the like. As shown in FIG. 73, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a power supply device 400, a game control device 100 (game control means, not shown), and an effect control device 300 (effect control means). Board surface relay board 915, frame relay board 916, cooling fan 45, LVDS board 918, ROM board 920, etc. are harnesses and connectors (CN).
It takes the form of being connected via.

The effect control device 300 is connected to the power supply device 400 and has a DC power supply (32V, 15V, 12).
V, 5V), power failure monitoring signal (5V), reset signal (5V) are input. Further, an analysis port 955 or the like can be connected to the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a voltage generation unit 800 (voltage generation means). The voltage generation unit 800 is 1.05V, 1.5V, from the DC power supply (5V) from the power supply device 400.
Generates an output voltage of 3.3V. The details of the voltage generation unit 800 will be described later.

The board surface relay board 915 is connected to the board surface motor driver 44a (a part of the board surface effect device 44), the board surface motor sensor 47a (directing accessory switch 47), and the board surface decoration LED driver 46a (a part of the board surface decoration device 46). It is a relay board for transmitting and receiving signals. In addition, the board relay board 9
In 15, the DC power supply (32V, 15V,
12V, 5V) is supplied.

The frame relay board 916 includes a frame motor driver 44b (a part of the frame effect device), an effect button switch 25a, a frame motor sensor 47b, a first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a), a second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b), and a frame. It is a relay board for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the decorative LED driver (a part of the frame decoration device 18). Further, on the frame relay board 916, the effect control device 30
DC power supply (12V, 5V) is supplied from the power supply device 400 via 0.

The cooling FAN 45 is a DC power supply (12V) from the power supply device 400 via the effect control device 300.
) Is supplied to operate.

The LVDS board 918 is a relay board that relays the effect control device 300 and the display device 41. A DC power supply (32V, 12V, 5V) is supplied from the power supply device 400 to the LVDS board 918 via the effect control device 300. Further, on the LVDS board 918, the voltage generation unit 8
A DC power supply (3.3V) is supplied from 00, and the DC power supply is output to the display device 41.

A power generation circuit 919 can be provided on the LVDS board 918. Power generation circuit 9
19 converts the DC power supply (32V) supplied from the power supply device 400 into a DC power supply (12V) and outputs it to the display device 41 (LED backlight 917). As a result, the power generation circuit 919 can be designed according to the standard of the display device 41 to be connected, and even when the display device 41 is replaced, it is necessary to modify the effect control device 300 simply by replacing the LVDS board 918. Therefore, the display device 41 can be easily replaced accordingly.

The ROM board 920 includes an image ROM 325 and outputs image information stored in the image ROM 325 to a VDP 312 (video display processor). A DC power supply (3.3V) is supplied to the ROM board 920 from the voltage generation unit 800.

The effect control device 300 includes a first VDP-RAM 923 (storage means) and a second VDP-R.
AM924 (storage means) is provided. 1st VDP-RAM 923 and 2nd VDP-
The RAM 924 is a storage medium that temporarily stores image information (moving images, still images) decoded by the VDP 312, and operates when a DC power supply (1.5V) is supplied from the voltage generation unit 800.

The VDP 312 (general-purpose port 942) constituting the effect control device 300 transmits and receives a signal to and from the outside by using a 3.3 V signal. However, the built-in host CPU that constitutes VDP312
(CPU311, image processing means, VDP core, arithmetic processing means) operates at 1.05V and operates at 1.05V.
The DRAMI / F940 connected to the first VDP-RAM 923 (storage means) and the second VDP-RAM 924 (storage means) operates at 1.5 V. Therefore, the VDP 312 operates by supplying a DC power supply (1.05V, 1.5V, 3.3V) from the voltage generation unit 800.

As the input side of the VDP 312, the effect control device 300 has a level conversion circuit 9 that performs level conversion (5.0V → 3.3V) of the signal of the power supply device 400 (power failure monitoring signal, reset signal).
21. Signal level conversion of game control device 100 (directing command) (5.0V → 3.3V)
Level conversion circuit 922, level conversion of the signal from the board motor sensor 47a (5.0)
Level conversion circuit 926 that performs V → 3.3V), level conversion circuit 929 that performs level conversion (5.0V → 3.3V) of signals from the effect button switch 25a and frame motor sensor 47b.
Is provided.

Further, as the output side of the VDP 312, the effect control device 300 is provided with a board surface relay board 915 (
Level conversion (3) of the signal transmitted to the board motor driver 44a, board motor sensor 47a)
.. Level conversion (3.3V → 5.0V) of the signal transmitted to the level conversion circuit 925 that performs (3V → 5.0V) and the frame relay board 916 (frame motor driver 44b, effect button switch 25a, frame motor sensor 47b). Level conversion (3.3V → 5.) of the signal transmitted to the display device 41 (LED backlight 917) via the level conversion circuit 928 and the LVDS board 918.
A level conversion circuit 934 that performs 0V) is provided.

Further, for bidirectional communication of VDP 312, the effect control device 300 is provided with a board decoration LE.
Level shift of the signal transmitted in both directions by the D driver 46a and the I2C communication method (3.3)
Level shift circuit 927 that performs V⇔5.0V) and frame decoration LED driver (decoration device 18)
Level shift (3.3V⇔5.0V) of signals transmitted in both directions by a) and I2C communication method
) Is provided for a level shift circuit 932.

The direct current power supply (15V) from the power supply device 400 is supplied to the effect control device 300, and the VD
Amplifier circuit 337 that amplifies the audio data output from P312 (first amplifier circuit 930)
, The second amplifier circuit 931) is provided. The first amplifier circuit 930 outputs the amplified audio data to the first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a), and the second amplifier circuit 931 outputs the amplified audio data to the second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b). do.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a protection circuit 933 that stabilizes the LVDS signal output from the VDP 312, and the protection circuit 933 is the display device 41 via the LVDS board 918.
The LVDS signal (3.3V) is output to.

The effect control device 300 includes a watchdog timer circuit 324 that monitors the operation of the VDP 312, and a PROM 321 that stores programs and various data executed by the VDP 312.
, FeRAM 323, a volume control switch 335, etc., which can retain the stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure, are provided. Further, the LVDS board 918 has a level shift circuit 9
A real-time clock circuit 338 connected to the high voltage (5V) side of 32 is provided.

The VDP 312 is a CPU 3 that analyzes an effect command transmitted from the game control device 100.
RAM 322 (built-in CP) that provides work areas for 11 (built-in host CPU) and CPU 311
U work memory), CPU I / F that sends and receives data in CPU311 and VDP312
937, HOSTCPUI / F938, VDP31 that transmits the data in PROM321 to the CPU311 and outputs various commands (display list, motor command, lamp command, sound command) obtained by the CPU311 analyzing the production command.
It has a system control register 939 that performs the initial setting of 2.

The VDP 312 includes a general-purpose port 942 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the outside, a CG bus I / F 941 for reading image information from the image ROM 325, a first VDP-RAM 923, and a second VDP-R.
It has a DRAMI / F940 that transmits and receives image information (moving images, still images) to and from AM924.

The VDP 312 has a controller 943 that outputs motor control data based on a motor command and outputs LED control data based on a lamp command. Controller 9
43 generates motor control data based on a motor command, and outputs the data to the board motor driver 44a, the board motor sensor 47a, the frame motor driver 44b, and the frame motor sensor 47b in a form that can be distinguished from each other.

Further, the controller 943 decodes the lamp command based on the lamp decoder 944 to generate LED control data, which is used as the board decoration LED driver 46a and the frame decoration LE.
Output to the D driver 18a (a part of the frame decoration device 18) in a form that can be distinguished from each other.

The VDP 312 has a sound ROM 327 that outputs voice data based on a sound command. The sound ROM 327 selects the voice data stored by itself based on the sound command, decodes the voice data based on the sound source LSI 314 (sound decoder), and adjusts the sound quality by the post-effector 945 and the volume control switch 335. The sound is output to the first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a) and the second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b).

The VDP 312 includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing based on a display list. The image processing circuit is an image ROM 325 or VRAM based on the display list.
A preloader circuit 946 that reads image information from 326 (storage means) and VRAM 326 (or a first VDP-RAM 923, a second VDP-RAM 924) that reads the image information.
A graphics decoder 947 that decodes to VRAM326 (or a second VDP)
-RAM 924) A drawing circuit 948 that draws image information in the frame buffer, a geometry engine 949 that sets the coordinates of the image information, and VRAM 326 (or the first V).
An index table circuit 950 that allocates a storage area in the DP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924) and a display circuit 951 (or a display circuit 951 (or) that displays and outputs frame buffer data and the like stored in the VRAM 326 (or the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924). Display A, display B, display C) and frame buffer data output selection circuit 95
It has a signal conversion circuit 313 that outputs to the display device 41 by the LVDS method or the like via 2, and a data transfer circuit 953 that transmits / receives data in the image processing circuit, and these are buses 95.
Data is transmitted and received to and from each other through 4.

The VDP 312 has an address bus 935 and a data bus 936. The address bus 935 includes a HOSTCPUI / F938, a system control register 939, and a DRAMI / F.
940, CG bus I / F941, general-purpose port 942, controller 943, sound ROM 32
7. Addresses are transmitted and received between the graphics decoder 947, the data transfer circuit 953, the preloader circuit 946, the display circuit 951, and the drawing circuit 948. Data bus 936
Is HOSTCPUI / F938, DRAMI / F940, VRAM326, CG Bus I
Data is transmitted / received between / F941, the controller 943, the sound ROM 327, the graphics decoder 947, the data transfer circuit 953, the preloader circuit 946, the display circuit 951, and the drawing circuit 948.

In the present embodiment, the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924 are DRAs.
It has a common address bus 959a and data bus 959b connected to MI / F940. The first VDP-RAM 923 can access the upper 8 bits of image information (16 bits) via the data bus 959b, and the second VDP-RAM 924 has the data bus 959b.
The lower 8 bits of the image information can be accessed via.

Here, in the image information (16 bits), the moving image (upper 8 bits) data and the still image (lower 8 bits) data are associated with one address. Therefore, the video data is the first VD.
It is stored in the P-RAM 923, and the still image data is stored in the second VDP-RAM 924.

As a result, when the display circuit 951 specifies one address for reading, the first VDP
-Since the moving image data stored in the RAM 923 and the still image data stored in the second VDP-RAM 924 can be read out at the same time, the image information (video data, still image data) to the display device 41 can be read. Transfer speed can be improved.

[Voltage generator]
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing a connection mode of a plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation unit 800 constituting the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 74, the voltage generation unit 800 includes a core voltage generation circuit 801 (first voltage generation circuit), a first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (second voltage generation circuit), and a second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 (first peripheral voltage generation circuit). It is composed of three voltage generation circuits). The core voltage generation circuit 801 and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 have the same configuration as the voltage generation circuit 900 (FIGS. 76 and 77) described later.

The core voltage generation circuit 801 receives a DC power supply (V _IN = 5V) from the power supply device 400 to drive the CPU 311 (VDP core, built-in host CPU) in the VDP 312 to drive the first output voltage (target voltage:: V1 = 1.05V) is generated and output to the CPU 311. Further, the core voltage generation circuit 801 is a PGD signal (power) that becomes HIGH when the first output voltage maintains a voltage in a predetermined voltage range (for example, target voltage ± 10%) centered on the target voltage (V1). It is provided with a PGD terminal that outputs a good signal) and outputs a PGD signal that becomes LOW when the voltage is out of the predetermined voltage range.

The first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 generates a second output voltage (target voltage: V2 = 1.5V) by inputting _{a DC power supply (V IN) from the power supply device 400, and uses this as the DRAMI of the VDP 312.} It outputs to / F940, the first VDP-RAM923, the second VDP-RAM924, and the like. However, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 has an EN terminal (enabled terminal).
While the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation permission signal, enable signal _VEN ) is input from the core voltage generation circuit 801 to the EN terminal, the second output is generated by generating the reference voltage V _{REF described later.} When the voltage can be generated and the PGD signal becomes LOW, the generation of the second output voltage is stopped immediately.

The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 generates a third output voltage (target voltage: V3 = 3.3V) by inputting _{a direct current power supply (V IN) from the power supply device 400, and uses this as I of the VDP 312.} / O (general-purpose port 942, etc.), image ROM 325 of ROM board 920, display device 41 (
It outputs to an LCD panel) or the like. The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 also has an EN terminal, and while the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation permission signal, enable signal _VEN ) is input from the core voltage generation circuit 801 to the EN terminal, the reference described later The third output voltage can be generated by generating the voltage V _REF, and when the PGD signal becomes LOW, the generation of the third output voltage is stopped immediately.

[Modification example of voltage generator]
FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a modified example of the connection form of a plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation unit 800 constituting the effect control device 300. In the voltage generation unit 800 shown in FIG. 75, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 maintains a voltage in a predetermined voltage range (for example, target voltage ± 10%) centered on the target voltage (V2) as the second output voltage. PGD signal (HIGH) when
(Second operation permission signal) is output, and when the voltage is out of the predetermined voltage range, the PGD signal (LOW) is output.
) Is provided as a PGD terminal. Then, the PGD terminal of the core voltage generation circuit 801 is connected to the EN terminal of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the PG of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 is connected.
The D terminal is connected to the EN terminal of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803. That is, the core voltage generation circuit 801 and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are connected in a string with respect to the PGD signal.

Therefore, while the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation permission signal), the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 can generate the second output voltage, and the first peripheral voltage is generated. While the circuit 802 is generating the PGD signal (HIGH) (second operation permission signal), the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is capable of generating the third output voltage.

On the other hand, when the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs a PGD signal (LOW), the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 prohibits the generation of the second output voltage, so that the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 outputs the PGD signal (LOW). However, the generation of the third output voltage is prohibited in the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803.

Further, even if the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs a PGD signal (HIGH), if the second output voltage of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 becomes lower than, for example, the predetermined voltage range, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 Outputs a PGD signal (LOW), so that the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
In 03, the generation of the third output voltage is prohibited.

In the present embodiment, in the case of FIG. 74, the target value (1.05V) of the first output voltage is the target value (1.5V) of the second output voltage and the target value (3.3V) of the third output voltage. ), Therefore, the rise of the entire effect control device 300 or the entire VDP 312 can be accelerated. Further, in the case of FIG. 75, the target value (1.05 V) of the first output voltage is designed to be lower than the target value (1.5 V) of the second output voltage, and the target value of the second output voltage (1.5 V) 1.5V)
Is designed to be lower than the target value (3.3V) of the third output voltage, so the effect control device 30
The rise of the entire 0 or the entire VDP 312 can be accelerated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the sound ROM 327 and the sound source LS are contained in the VDP 312.
I314 is incorporated. However, when these are separated from the VDP 312, for example, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 may supply DC power to the sound ROM 327 and the sound source LSI 314.

Further, in the present embodiment, when _{the magnitude of the first output voltage as the output voltage V OUT} is monitored and the first output voltage is out of the predetermined voltage range, the first is generated by the PGD signal output by the core voltage generation circuit 801. Generation of the second output voltage of the peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
The configuration is such that the permission / prohibition of the generation of the third output voltage of 03 is determined. However, the magnitude of the input voltage _{V IN,} maps the relationship between the output voltage _{V OUT,} by monitoring the magnitude of the input voltage _{V IN,} the range of the output voltage the input voltage _{V IN} is to enable the CPU311 When the value to be generated is reached, a LOW signal is output to the EN terminal of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the EN terminal of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 to output the LOW signal to the second output of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802. The configuration may be such that the generation of the voltage and the generation of the third output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are prohibited.

[Voltage generation circuit]
FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a connection form between the voltage generation circuit 900 and its peripheral elements as an example of the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803. The voltage generation circuit 900 has a form in which a plurality of external terminals are arranged on one chip. _{As an external terminal, P where the input voltage V IN} from the power supply device 400 is input.
AV that supplies power for control to the VIN terminal and internal circuit (control circuit 901, etc., see FIG. 77)
IN terminal, MODE terminal for setting whether to enable the efficiency improvement function when the load is low, EN terminal for allowing / prohibiting the generation of output voltage, SS for setting the soft start time described later.
Terminal, ITH terminal to which phase compensation circuit is connected, PGND terminal to be the ground on the output side of the voltage generation circuit 900, AGND terminal to be the ground for the internal circuit, _FB terminal to which the feedback voltage VFB is input, voltage generation circuit It has a SW terminal on the output side of the 900, a BOOT terminal for voltage adjustment, and a PGD terminal that outputs a power good signal indicating that the output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is good.

A smoothing circuit in which the inductor L and the capacitor C0 are connected in series is connected to the SW terminal (switch terminal), and the inductor L is connected to the SW terminal. _{Further, a V OUT} terminal that is an output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is connected to the contact N1 between the inductor L and the capacitor C0. One end of the capacitor C0 is connected to the contact N1 and the other end is grounded.

Further, a voltage dividing circuit in which the resistor R1 and the resistor R2 are connected in series is connected to the contact N1, and the resistor R1 is connected to the contact N1. One end of the resistor R2 is connected to R1 and the other end is grounded. The contact N3 between the resistor R1 and the resistor R2 is connected to the FB terminal (feedback terminal).

One end of the capacitor C1 (and the capacitor C5) for reducing ripple is connected to the PVIN terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C1 is grounded.

One end of the capacitor C5 for reducing ripple is connected to the AVIN terminal, and the capacitor C
The other end of 5 is grounded. The MODE terminal is connected to the AVIN terminal.

The MODE terminal is a control circuit 901, which will be described later, when the output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is low.
It is a terminal that sets whether or not to enable the efficiency improvement function of, and if the applied voltage to the MODE terminal is set to 0.8 V or more (input the input voltage _VIN ), the efficiency improvement function becomes effective. If the voltage applied to the MODE terminal is reduced to, for example, 0.2 V or less (grounded), the efficiency improving function becomes invalid and PWM control described later with a fixed frequency is executed. Further, regardless of the above settings, PWM control is executed when the load is high.

The EN terminal (enable terminal) is _{connected to the input voltage VIN} (own AVIN terminal) in the core voltage generation circuit 801 and is connected to the core voltage generation circuit 801 in the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802.
In the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, it is connected to the PGD terminal of the core voltage generation circuit 801 or the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (see FIGS. 74 and 75).

One end of the capacitor C4 is connected to the SS terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C4 is grounded.

A phase compensation circuit in which the resistor R3 and the capacitor C3 are connected in series is connected to the ITH terminal, and the resistor R3 is connected to the ITH terminal. One end of the capacitor C3 is connected to the resistor R3 and the other end is grounded.

One end of a resistor R4 (pull-up resistor) is connected to the PGD terminal, and the other end of the resistor R4 is P.
It is connected to the VIN terminal (input voltage V _IN).

One end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the BOOT terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the contact N2 between the SW terminal and the inductor L.

[Internal block diagram of voltage generation circuit]
FIG. 77 is an internal block diagram of the voltage generation circuit 900. The voltage generation circuit 900 includes a control circuit 901, a first transistor Q1, a second transistor Q2, a reference voltage generation circuit 904, and the like.
It is composed of a soft start circuit 905, an error amplifier 907, an oscillation circuit 908, a PWM comparator 909, and the like.

Although the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are both NMOS transistors (N-channel metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistors), the first transistor Q1 may be a MIMO transistor (P-channel metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor). ..

The drain terminal of the first transistor Q1 is connected to the PVIN terminal, the source terminal is connected to the SW terminal and the drain terminal of the second transistor Q2 via the contact N4, and the gate terminal is connected to the first buffer 902.

The drain terminal of the second transistor Q2 is connected to the source terminal and the SW terminal of the first transistor Q1 via the contact N4, the source terminal is connected to the PGND terminal, and the gate terminal is connected to the second buffer 903.

The voltage generation circuit 900 is provided with a bootstrap circuit in which the diode Db and the capacitor C2 are connected in series. In the voltage generation circuit 900, the anode of the diode Db is connected to the PVIN terminal, the cathode of the diode Db is connected to one of the capacitors C2 via the BOOT terminal, and the other of the capacitors C2 is connected to the SW terminal as described above. Has been done. Therefore, a voltage that is the sum of the voltage drop in the diode Db and the applied voltage to the capacitor C2 is always applied between the drain terminal and the source terminal of the first transistor Q1, and the first buffer 902 is the same as the applied voltage to the capacitor C2. A voltage is applied. Therefore, even if the NMOS transistor is applied as the first transistor Q1,
The bootstrap circuit can ensure that the first transistor Q1 is turned on.

The control circuit 901 has a fixed frequency pulse width modulation (PWM).
The first transistor Q1 is turned on and off alternately by the modulation) control or the pulse control based on the efficiency improvement function.
1 on-signal S1 (HIGH, LOW) and 2nd transistor Q2 on-signal S2 (LOW)
, HIGH) is output. However, the on / off states of the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are controlled to be reversed so that the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are turned on at the same time and a through current is not generated. Further, at this time, control may be performed so that one is turned off and the other is turned on after the dead time has elapsed.

Here, the efficiency function, the output voltage V _OUT is the output voltage V _O by performing on-off control of the first transistor Q1 and second transistor Q2 if they fell to a predetermined threshold voltage
_{When the UT} is recovered and the output voltage V _OUT is maintained higher than the predetermined threshold voltage, the output of the control circuit 901 is omitted by thinning out _{the clock signal V CLK from the oscillation circuit 908 (} As a result, it is a function of improving the efficiency of the voltage generation circuit 900 (reducing power consumption) by thinning out the on / off of the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2).

Therefore, the pulse control based on the efficiency improvement function is effective _{when the load connected to the output voltage V OUT} is low, that is, when the voltage drop rate of the _{output voltage V OUT is low.}

In the voltage generation circuit 900, either normal PWM modulation control or the pulse control can be selected. For example, when the input voltage _VIN is input to the MODE terminal, the pulse control can be selected, and when the MODE terminal is grounded, the PWM modulation control can be selected. However, when the load connected to the output voltage V _OUT is high, the output voltage V _O
The speed of the voltage drop of the _{UT becomes faster, the frequency of thinning out the clock signal V CLK} decreases, and the state becomes substantially the same as the PWM modulation control. Therefore, in the case of a high load, the voltage generation circuit 900
Generates an _{output voltage V OUT} by PWM modulation control even if the pulse control is selected.

The reference voltage generation circuit 904 is connected to the EN terminal and generates a reference voltage V _{REF when an enable signal VEN} (PGD signal (HIGH) or input voltage V _{IN) is input.}
When the enable signal _VEN is cut off (when the PGD signal (LOW) is input), the generation of the _{reference voltage V REF is stopped.}

In the steady state, the output voltage V _OUT and the reference voltage V _REF (= V _FB ) are V _OUT =
((R1 + R2) / R2) ・ There is a relationship of _{V REF.} Therefore, the target voltage of the first output voltage (
V1 = 1.05V), the target voltage of the second output voltage (V2 = 1.5V), and the target voltage of the third output voltage (V3 = 3.3V) adjust the _{resistance R1, resistance R2, and reference voltage V REF.} It can be set by doing.

Soft start circuitry 905, for example, when the reference voltage generating circuit 904 generates the reference voltage V _REF to supply charge to the capacitor C4, and outputs a voltage applied to the capacitor C4 as a soft-start voltage V _SS. The soft start voltage V _SS becomes a value larger than _{V REF} after a predetermined time (for example, 1 ms) has elapsed since the soft start circuit 905 starts supplying electric charge to the capacitor C4.

The power good circuit has a determination circuit 906 and a third transistor Q3. The determination circuit 906 is connected to the FB terminal and the gate terminal of the third transistor Q3. The drain terminal of the third transistor Q3 is connected to the PGD terminal, and the source terminal is grounded.

The determination circuit 906 drives when a predetermined voltage is applied to the AVIN terminal and outputs an ON signal (HIGH) to the third transistor Q3 to turn on the third transistor Q3. At this time, _{since the current from the resistor R4 connected to the input voltage VIN} flows through the third transistor Q3 (see FIG. 76), the output of the PGD terminal connected to the drain side of the third transistor Q3 is LOW. Become. On the other hand, the determination circuit 906 makes the third transistor Q3 non-conducting by stopping the on signal _{when the feedback voltage V FB falls within a predetermined voltage range, and sets the output of the PGD terminal to HIGH.}

In the determination circuit 906, the predetermined voltage range may have a hysteresis characteristic, and the predetermined voltage range (for example, V _{FB) when the output of the PGD terminal is maintained at HIGH, that is, the output of the on signal is maintained.} = V _{REF ± 10% or less) and the predetermined voltage range (for example, V FB} = V _REF ± 7% or less) when the output of the PGD terminal is changed from LOW to HIGH, that is, when the on signal is restored, are different from each other. There is.

In the error amplifier 907, the first non-inverting input terminal is connected to the output side of the reference voltage generation circuit 904, the second non-inverting input terminal is connected to the output side of the soft start circuit 905, and the inverting input terminal is connected to the FB terminal. The output terminal is connected to the inverting input terminal of the PWM comparator 909. Further, a phase compensation circuit (resistor R3, capacitor C3) is connected to the output terminal to stabilize the operation of the entire voltage generation circuit 900.

_{The error amplifier 907 generates an error signal V ERR} based on the difference between the smaller of the reference voltage V _REF and the soft start voltage V _SS and the feedback voltage V _FB, and outputs this to the PWM comparator 909. ..

As the oscillation circuit 908, for example, a ring oscillator in which a plurality of inverters or differential amplifiers are connected in a ring shape, a CR transmission circuit, an LC oscillation circuit, or the like can be applied. The oscillation circuit 908 is
For example, it starts when a predetermined voltage is applied to the AVIN terminal, and generates a clock signal V _{CLK based on V REF} and V _SS.

The slope signal V _SLOPE is, for example, an on signal (HIGH) in the _{clock signal V CLK.}
By integrating the signal) in the time direction, a waveform that repeats a slope that rises with the passage of time due to the oscillation frequency is obtained. The oscillation circuit 908 outputs the clock signal V _CLK to the set terminal S of the flip-flop circuit 910, and PWMs the _{slope signal V SLOPE.}
Output to the non-inverting input terminal of the comparator 909.

In the PWM comparator 909, the inverting input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the error amplifier 907, and the non-inverting input terminal is connected to the output terminal of _{the slope signal V SLOPE of the oscillation circuit 908.} The PWM comparator 909 includes a slope signal V _SLOPE and an error signal V _{ERR.
A PWM signal V PRM} is generated based on the magnitude relationship with the flip-flop circuit 91.
Output to the reset terminal R of 0. At this time, for example, in the case of _{V ERR} ≧ V _{SLOPE, P}
The WM signal V _PWM can be set to HIGH (high voltage), and when V _ERR <V _SLOPE , the PWM signal V _PWM can be set to LOW (low voltage).

Flip-flop circuit 910 is to generate and output a control signal V _Q of the duty ratio control circuit 901 is required. _{The clock signal V CLK} of the oscillation circuit 908 is input to the set terminal S of the flip flop circuit 910, the _{PWM signal V PWM} is input from the PWM comparator 909 to the reset terminal R, _{and the control signal V Q} is input from the output terminal Q. It is output and this is input to the control circuit 901. The control signal V _Q is for generating, for example, the on signal S1 of the first transistor Q1, and the clock signal V _CLK changes from LOW to H.
When it becomes IGH, it changes from LOW to HIGH, and when the PWM signal V _PWM changes from LOW to HIGH, it changes from HIGH to LOW. In the control circuit 901, the ON signal S2 of the second transistor Q2 is the control signal V _Q and the clock signal V _CLK.
Based on the above, when the control signal V _Q is HIGH, it becomes LOW, and when the control signal V _Q is LOW, it becomes HIGH.

The reduced voltage protection circuit 911 monitors the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal to monitor the reduced voltage abnormality.

The short-circuit protection circuit 912 operates using, for example, the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power source.
The feedback voltage _VFB is monitored to detect a short circuit abnormality.

The temperature protection circuit 913 operates using, for example, the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power source.
The temperature of the voltage generation circuit 900 is monitored to detect a temperature abnormality.

The overvoltage protection circuit 914 operates using, for example, the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power source _{, monitors the feedback voltage VFB} , and detects an overvoltage abnormality.

Explaining the operation of the voltage generation circuit 900, first, for example, when the on signal S2 of the first transistor Q1 rises from LOW to HIGH when the on signal S2 is in the LOW state, the first transistor Q1 is turned on (conducting), and the first transistor Q1 is turned on (conducting). The second transistor Q2 of the two-transistor Q2 is off (
Since it is non-conducting), the switch voltage V _SW, which is the voltage of the SW terminal, becomes HIGH. At this time, the slope voltage V _SLOPE starts to rise from the initial value with a predetermined slope.

After that, when the slope voltage V _SLOPE becomes higher than the error signal V _ERR , the on signal S1 becomes LOW and the on signal S2 becomes HIGH, whereby the switch voltage V _SW
Becomes LOW. At this time, the slope voltage V _SLOPE voltage is reset to the initial value.

By the way, the intersection timing of _{the error signal V ERR} and the slope voltage V _SLOPE becomes slower as the _{error signal V ERR becomes higher.} Therefore, the ON period of the first transistor Q1 becomes longer, and the duty ratio of the ON period becomes larger. On the contrary, the _{lower the error signal V ERR, the} earlier the intersection timing with the slope voltage V _SLOPE. Therefore, the first transistor Q1
The on-period of is shortened, and the duty ratio of the on-period becomes smaller.

As described above, the switch voltage V _SW repeats HIGH and LOW, but the inductor L
_{And the output voltage V OUT in} which the voltage fluctuation is suppressed within a predetermined range is generated through the smoothing circuit by the capacitor C0. Then, by determining the duty ratio of the first transistor Q1 according to the error signal V _ERR , a desired output voltage V _OUT is generated _{from the input voltage V IN.}

Soft start voltage _{V SS} is the enable signal _{V EN} (or, PGD signal (HIG
H), Input voltage V _IN ) After input, it gradually rises from 0V, and finally the reference voltage V _REF.
It rises to a higher voltage value. Further, the error amplifier 907 generates an _{error signal V ERR} according to the difference _{between the lower reference voltage V REF} and the soft start voltage V _SS and the feedback voltage V _FB. Therefore, during the period when the soft start voltage V _SS is lower than the reference voltage V _{REF , an error signal V RR} corresponding to the difference between the _{feedback voltage V FB} and the soft start voltage V _SS is generated.

Such error signal V _ERR generated by the gradually gently rises from 0V vicinity with increasing soft-start voltage V _SS. Therefore, since the duty ratio of the first transistor Q1 also gradually increases from the minimum value, it is possible to prevent an inrush current to the load connected to the _{capacitors C0 and V OUT.}

[Time chart 1 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off]
FIG. 78 shows the core voltage generation circuit 801 and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 8 according to the connection form of FIG. 74.
02, It is a time chart at the time of power-on and power-off of the output voltage of the 2nd peripheral voltage generation circuit 803. Core voltage generation circuit 801 of this embodiment, first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, second
Changes in the output voltage of the peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 when the power is turned on and when the power is cut off will be described.

At time t0, the core voltage generating circuit 801, the input voltage V _IN from the power supply 400 is turned on, to generate a first output voltage based on the soft-start voltage V _SS to output the soft-start circuit 905 increases this Let me. On the other hand, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second
In the peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, the input voltage _VIN is input, but the PGD signal input to the EN terminal is in the LOW state, and the generation of the second output voltage and the third output voltage is prohibited.

At time t1, the first output voltage is 7% lower than the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V).
When it reaches 977V, the core voltage generation circuit 801 receives a PGD signal (HIG) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
03, second output voltage, respectively, started to produce a third output voltage at the same time, (or at a different speed) at a predetermined speed on the basis of the soft-start voltage V _SS rises. After that, the first output voltage converges to the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V), and the second output voltage becomes the target voltage (V2 =).
It converges to 1.5V), and the third output voltage converges to the target voltage (V3 = 3.3V) and becomes a steady state.

When the first output voltage starts to decrease at time t3 and the first output voltage becomes less than 0.945V, which is 10% lower than V1 at time t4, the core voltage generation circuit 801 sets the PDG signal to H.
Switch from IGH to LOW. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are prohibited from generating the second output voltage and the third output voltage, respectively, and the second output voltage and the third output voltage immediately decrease. It becomes 0V. At this time, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
02 of the soft-start voltage _{V SS,} and a soft-start voltage _{V SS} of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 becomes 0V. The drop speeds of the second output voltage and the third output voltage depend on the size of the capacitor components of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, respectively.

After that, when the first output voltage recovers to 0.977V or more, which is 7% lower than V1, the core voltage generation circuit 801 switches the PDG signal from LOW to HIGH again, and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage The generation circuit 803 has the second output voltage and the third output voltage, respectively, as described above.
The output voltage can be generated.

Here, in the core voltage generation circuit 801 (voltage generation circuit 900), the first output voltage is outside the range of the first predetermined voltage range ΔVa1 (V1 ± 7%: 0.9765V ≦ ΔVa1 ≦ 1.1235V). A PGD signal (HIGH) is output when the voltage falls within the range. Further, the first output voltage is the first predetermined voltage range ΔVb1 (V1 ± 10%: 0.945).
A PGD signal (LOW) is output when the voltage within the range of V ≦ ΔV b1 ≦ 1.155 V) changes to a voltage outside the range. Therefore, even when the first output voltage exceeds 1.155V, the PGD signal (LOW) is output, and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 have the second output voltage and the third, respectively. The generation of output voltage is prohibited.

Similarly, in the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (voltage generation circuit 900), the second output voltage is the second.
A PGD signal (HIGH) can be output when a voltage outside the predetermined voltage range ΔVa2 (V2 ± 7%: 1.395V ≦ ΔVa2 ≦ 1.605V) becomes a voltage within the range. can. Further, the second output voltage is the second predetermined voltage range ΔVb2 (V2 ± 10%).
: 1.35V ≦ ΔVb2 ≦ 1.65V) When the voltage is changed from the voltage within the range to the voltage outside the range, the PGD signal (LOW) can be output.

Similarly, in the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 (voltage generation circuit 900), the third output voltage is the third.
A PGD signal (HIGH) can be output when a voltage outside the predetermined voltage range ΔVa3 (V3 ± 7%: 3.069V ≦ ΔVa3 ≦ 3.531V) becomes a voltage within the range. can. Further, the third output voltage is the third predetermined voltage range ΔVb3 (V3 ± 10%).
: 2.97V ≦ ΔVb3 ≦ 3.63V) When the voltage changes from the voltage within the range to the voltage outside the range, the PGD signal (LOW) can be output.

[Time chart 2 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off]
FIG. 79 is a time chart of the output voltages of the core voltage generation circuit 801 and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 in the form of a string-like connection of FIG. 75 when the power is turned on and when the power is cut off. be. FIG. 79 shows a time in which the output voltages of the core voltage generation circuit 801 and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 increase in order when the power is turned on and decrease in order when the power is cut off. It is a chart.

Similarly to the above, at time t0, the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the soft start voltage V output by the soft start circuit 905 when the _{input voltage VIN is input from the power supply device 400.
The first output voltage is generated and raised based on the SS} , but the generation of the second output voltage and the third output voltage is still prohibited.

At time t1, the first output voltage is 7% lower than the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V).
When it reaches 977V, the core voltage generation circuit 801 receives a PGD signal (HIG) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. Thus, the first peripheral voltage generating circuit 802 starts to generate a second output voltage, rises at a predetermined speed on the basis of the soft-start voltage V _SS. Further, the first output voltage converges to the target voltage (V1 = 1.05V).

At time t2, the second output voltage is 7% lower than the target voltage (V2 = 1.5V) 1.3
When it reaches 5V, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 receives a PGD signal (HIG) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. Thus, the second peripheral voltage generating circuit 803 starts to generate a third output voltage, it rises at a predetermined speed on the basis of the soft-start voltage V _SS. Then, the second output voltage converges to the target voltage (V2 = 1.5V), and then the third output voltage also converges to the target voltage (V3 =).
It converges to 3.3V) and becomes a steady state.

When the first output voltage starts to decrease at time t3 and the first output voltage becomes less than 0.945V, which is 10% lower than V1 at time t4, the core voltage generation circuit 801 sets the PDG signal to H.
Switch from IGH to LOW. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 is prohibited from generating the second output voltage, and the second output voltage immediately drops to 0V.

When the second output voltage starts to decrease at time t4 and the second output voltage becomes less than 1.35 V, which is 10% lower than V2 at time t5, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 switches the PDG signal from HIGH to LOW. .. As a result, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is prohibited from generating the third output voltage, and the third output voltage immediately drops to 0V.

Even if the core voltage generation circuit 801 is operating normally, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802
By stopping the generation of the third output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 when the second output voltage of the second output voltage drops, it is possible to prevent the peripheral circuit of the display device 41 or the like from malfunctioning.

[Production control device and LVDS board housing]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the outer shapes of the effect control device 300 and the LVDS substrate 918. FIG. 8
As shown in 0, the effect control device 300 and the LVDS substrate 918 are arranged in separate housings. For example, one corner of the housing 956 that houses the effect control device 300 is cut out in a rectangular parallelepiped, and the LVDS substrate 918 is housed in the rectangular parallelepiped housing 957 that is slightly smaller in the width direction and the depth direction than the rectangular parallelepiped. have. Although not shown, the housing 95
6. The housing 957 is connected by a harness and a connector. Since the effect control device 300 is separated from the LVDS board 918 in this way, by designing the housing 956 that houses the effect control device 300 with a strong one, unauthorized modification of the effect control device 300 and the like can be prevented. can do.

Further, since there is a gap 958 between the housing 956 and the housing 957, the LVDS board 918 (
It is possible to reduce the heat generated by the power generation circuit 919) being transferred to the effect control device 300. Further, it is preferable to form a heat sink by forming a concavo-convex shape by inserting a large number of slits on the surface of the housing 957 accommodating the LVDS substrate 918. In FIG. 79, vertically long fins 960 are formed on the side surface of the housing 957, and a circular heat dissipation hole 961 is formed on the upper surface of the housing 957, but they may be mounted in reverse. As described above, the surface area of the housing 957 (LVDS substrate 918) can be increased to improve the amount of heat radiation and prevent the LVDS substrate 918 from being deteriorated by heat.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
According to the fourth embodiment, the game machine 10 displays on the display device 41 a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game for varyingly displaying identification information, and an effect related to the variable display game. A possible effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is a storage unit (for example, a first VDP-RAM) for storing image information.
923, storage circuits such as the second VDP-RAM 924) and game control means (game control device 1)
An image processing means (CPU311, an image processing circuit) that processes image information based on a command from 00), a voltage generating means (voltage generation unit 800) that can generate a voltage to be supplied to the storage means and the image processing means, and the like. To be equipped. The voltage generation means (voltage generation unit 800) generates a first output voltage (target voltage: V1 = 1.05V) to be applied to the image processing means, and the first output voltage is the first.
A first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) that outputs a first operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) when the voltage is within a predetermined voltage range (ΔVa1), and a storage means when the first operation permission signal is input. (For example, the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) that generates the second output voltage (target voltage: V2 = 1.5V) applied to the first VDP-RAM 923, the second VDP-RAM 924). The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) is provided with the first voltage generation circuit.
When the output voltage is out of the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1), the first operation permission signal (PGD signal (H)
By stopping the output of IGH)), the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802)
) Stops the generation of the second output voltage.

As a result, the image processing means (CPU3) constituting the effect control means (effect control device 300)
When the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) to 11) is stopped (or the voltage drops), the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) By stopping the generation of the storage means (for example, the first VDP-RAM923, the second V).
It is possible to prevent a malfunction of the DP-RAM 924). For example, for image processing means (CP
The power supply to the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) of the U311 is stopped (for U311).
Or, as a result of the voltage drop), the image processing means (CPU311) is transmitted from the first voltage generation circuit.
), When the voltage supply to the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped, the generation of the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped, so that the storage means (for example, the first) is stopped.
It is possible to prevent malfunction of the VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924).

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the target value (1.05V) of the first output voltage is lower than the target value of the second output voltage (1.5V). As a result, it is possible to speed up the rise of the entire effect control means (effect control device 300) including the storage means and the image processing means.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a peripheral circuit (for example, general-purpose port 942, RO) connected to the image processing means (CPU311, image processing circuit).
The voltage generating means (voltage generating unit 800) including the M board 920 and the display device 41) applies a third output voltage (target voltage: V3 = 3.3V) to the peripheral circuit when the first operation permission signal is input. )
A third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is provided. The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) stops the output of the first operation permission signal (PDG signal (HIGH)) when the first output voltage falls outside the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1). The generation of the second output voltage by the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) and the generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) are stopped.

As a result, the image processing means (CPU3) constituting the effect control means (effect control device 300)
When the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) to 11) is stopped (or the voltage drops), the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) By stopping the generation of the third output voltage and the generation of the third output voltage of the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803), malfunction of the storage means and the peripheral circuit is prevented.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is
When the second output voltage is within the second predetermined voltage range (ΔVa2), the second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) is output, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is an image processing means (CP).
A peripheral circuit (for example, general-purpose port 942, ROM board 920, display device 41) connected to the U311 (image processing circuit) is provided, and the voltage generation means (voltage generation unit 800) receives a second operation permission signal. A third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) that generates a third output voltage (target voltage: V3 = 3.3V) applied to the peripheral circuit is provided. The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) stops the output of the first operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) when the first output voltage falls outside the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1). The generation of the second output voltage by the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped, and the second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) is stopped as the generation of the second output voltage is stopped. By stopping the output, the generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is stopped. The second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) receives a second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) when the second output voltage falls outside the second predetermined voltage range (ΔVb2).
)) By stopping the output, the generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is stopped.

As a result, the image processing means (CPU3) constituting the effect control means (effect control device 300)
When the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) to 11) is stopped (or the voltage drops), the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) By stopping the generation of the third output voltage and the generation of the third output voltage of the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803), malfunction of the storage means and the peripheral circuit is prevented. Further, even if the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) is operating normally, the third voltage is generated when the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) drops. By stopping the generation of the third output voltage of the generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803), it is possible to prevent the peripheral circuit from malfunctioning.

Further, in the above configuration, the storage means for storing the image information is replaced with the storage means for storing the audio information (sound ROM 327 or the like), and the image processing means for processing the image information is replaced with the audio processing means for processing the audio information (sound ROM 327 or the like). The fourth embodiment can be applied even if it is replaced with CPU311).

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

10 Pachinko machine 25 Directing button 25b Touch panel 30 Gaming board 32 Gaming area 36 1st start winning opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variable winning device 41 Display device 42 3rd start winning opening 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
300 production control device (sub-board)
311 CPU
610 Variable display area 615 Variable display area 630 Hold display area 633 Hold display 640 Hold digestion area 650 Special figure 1 Hold number display part 660 Special figure 2 Hold number display part 680 Fanfare background 681 Big hit characters (big hit display)
800 Voltage generator 801 Core voltage generator circuit (1st voltage generator circuit)
802 First peripheral voltage generation circuit (second voltage generation circuit)
803 Second peripheral voltage generation circuit (third voltage generation circuit)
923 1st VDP-RAM
924 2nd VDP-RAM

Claims (2)

A display means capable of displaying a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game are provided, and the variable display game is displayed. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a gaming value to a player when the result becomes a special result.
A start storage means that extracts a predetermined random number based on the establishment of the start condition and stores it as a start memory of the variable display game.
A start memory display control means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area is provided.
When the start memory display control means can execute a start memory display change effect capable of changing the display mode of the start memory display displayed in the start memory display area, and also executes the start memory display change effect. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect on
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect.
When the display result of the variable display game is the special result, the first predetermined effect is more likely to be selected than the second predetermined effect.
Further, the display mode of the start memory display which is the target of the start memory display change effect after executing the first predetermined effect and the target of the start memory display change effect after executing the second predetermined effect. wherein when the display mode of the start memory display are the same, the person at the time of executing the second predetermined effect becomes the target of the start memory display change effect than when executing the first predetermined effect A gaming machine characterized in that the display result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory display is highly reliable as the special result. The start memory display control means
Even during the execution of the variable display game, the start memory display corresponding to the running variable display game can be displayed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the start memory display change effect and the predetermined effect can be executed for the start memory display corresponding to the variable display game being executed.

Images